JP6737753B2 - Amusement machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine capable of playing a game.

As a gaming machine, a game ball, which is a game medium, is launched into a game area by a launching device, and when the game ball wins a winning area such as a winning opening provided in the game area, a predetermined prize value is given to the player. There is one configured in. Further, a variable display means capable of variably displaying the identification information (also referred to as “variation”) is provided, and when the display result of the variable display of the identification information is the specific display result, the predetermined game value is obtained. There is one configured to give the player (so-called pachinko machine).

The prize value is to pay out a prize ball or give a score or a prize according to the winning of the game ball in the prize area. In addition, the game value is that the state of the variable winning ball device provided in the game area of the gaming machine becomes a state advantageous for the player who easily hits the ball when the specific display result is obtained, and That is, the right to generate an advantageous state is generated, and the condition for paying out a prize ball is easily established.

In the pachinko gaming machine, as a display result of the variable display of the special symbol (identification information), which is started in the variable display means based on the fact that the game ball has won the starting winning opening, a predetermined specific display mode is derived and displayed. When it is done, "big hit (advantageous state)" occurs. The derivation display is to stop and display the symbol. When a big hit occurs, for example, the big winning opening is opened a predetermined number of times, and a big hit game state in which a hit ball is easy to win is entered. Then, in each opening period, when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning holes are won, the winning holes are closed. The number of times the special winning opening is opened is fixed to a predetermined number (for example, 16 rounds). An opening time (for example, 29 seconds) is determined for each opening, and the special winning opening is closed when the opening time elapses even if the number of winnings does not reach a predetermined number. Hereinafter, the opening period of each special winning opening may be referred to as a round.

In such a gaming machine, based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the specific area in the predetermined state after the predetermined condition is satisfied, it is possible to control the advantageous area advantageous to the player, and A variable display of the ordinary identification information is configured to be executable based on the passage (that is, a specific area is shared between the case of controlling the advantageous state and the variable display of the ordinary identification information). There is. For example, in Patent Document 1, when the display result of the variable display becomes the big hit display result, the right is controlled to the right generation state, and in the right generation state, the game ball is the first specific gate, the second specific gate, and the third specific gate. It is described that the big hit game state is controlled on the basis of passing one of the specific gates. Moreover, it is described that a part of the third specific gate may also be used as the general-purpose gate.

JP, 2013-039302, A (paragraphs 0057, 0058, 0063).

However, in this case, in the gaming machine configured to serve as the specific area when controlling the advantageous state as described in Patent Document 1 and when performing the variable display of the normal identification information, the effect is given from the game control means. It is necessary to output information appropriately to the control means.

Therefore, in the present invention, in the gaming machine configured to share a specific area when controlling to an advantageous state and when performing variable display of normal identification information , the state is appropriately grasped by the effect control means side. The purpose is to be able to output information appropriately.

(Means 1) A game machine according to the present invention is a game machine capable of playing a game, and includes a game control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 560) for controlling the progress of the game, and a game control means. And the effect control means (for example, effect control microcomputer 200) for controlling the effect based on the information of, and the game control means changes the first identification information based on the game medium entering the starting area. Based on the variable display executing means for executing the display and executing the variable display of the second identification information based on the entry of the game medium into the variable means, and the variable display of the first identification information or the variable display of the second identification information. An advantageous state advantageous to the player based on the fact that the game medium (eg, game ball) has entered the specific area (eg, the gate 32) after a predetermined condition (eg, the fact that the jackpot pattern has been derived and displayed) is satisfied. Advantageous state control means (for example, a portion that executes steps S306 to S308, S356 to S358 in the game control microcomputer 560) that can be controlled to (for example, a big hit game state), and the variable means can be easily controlled to the easy entry state. Special state control means that can be controlled to a special state, and normal variable display execution means (for example, game) that can execute variable display of normal identification information (for example, normal symbol) based on the fact that the game medium has entered a specific area. Based on that the control microcomputer 560 executes steps S5100 to S5102) and the display result of the variable display of the normal identification information is the predetermined display result (e.g., winning symbol), the changing means (e.g., variable). Variable means control means (for example, the portion that executes steps S5103 to S5104 in the game control microcomputer 560) that controls the winning ball device 15) to the easy entry state (for example, the open state), and information is output to the effect control means. And an information output means (for example, a portion of the game control microcomputer 560 that executes steps S5113 and S5114), the special state control means, as a special state, the first special state and the first special state. By comparison, it is possible to control to a second special state in which it is easy to give a game value by controlling the special state, and the information output means specifies different depending on the state based on the game medium having entered the specific area. Entry information (for example, a gate passage A designation command, a gate passage B designation command) is output (for example, in modification 2, a game control microcomputer 560). Sends a gate passage A designation command when not in the gate passage waiting state, and transmits a gate passage B designation command when in the gate passage waiting state. Further, for example, the game control microcomputer 560 may transmit a gate passage 1 designation command in the non-KT state, and may transmit a gate passage 2 designation command in the KT state. ), the starting area is provided so that the game medium flowing down the first path of the flow-down path through which the game medium flows down can enter, and the specific area and the variable means are the second path different from the first path of the flow-down path. Based on the specific entry information being input when the game medium flowing down is entered, and the effect control means is not controlled to the advantageous state and is not controlled to the special state, A promotion notification means capable of executing a promotion notification for promoting the emission of the game medium to the route, and an entry effect can be executed based on the fact that the game medium has entered the special area when the special state is controlled in the second special state. seen containing a Do demonstration execution means, a penetration effect is not executed if the game medium has entered the special area when the control of the special conditions in the first special state, directing execution means as ingress effect, second A display indicating that the game medium has entered the special area during the second special state is displayed while displaying a corresponding display corresponding to the game value given based on the entry of the game medium into the special area during the special state. It is characterized by executing . According to such a configuration, the state can be appropriately grasped on the side of the effect control unit, and the information can be appropriately output .

(Means 2) In the means 1, the effect control means is capable of executing an effect corresponding to the variable display of the normal identification information (for example, left-handed display) based on the input of the specific entry information. (For example, the part which performs step S684 in the effect control microcomputer 200) may be included. With such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately execute the effect corresponding to the variable display of the normal identification information.

(Means 3) In the means 1 or the means 2, the game control means, based on the fact that the game medium (for example, a game ball) has entered the starting area (for example, the first starting winning opening 13) , the first identification information (for example, , The first special symbol) is variably displayed, and based on the game medium having entered the variable means (for example, the variable winning ball device 15) , the variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) is performed. Variable display executing means (for example, a portion of the game control microcomputer 560 that executes steps S300 to S304, S350 to S354) and a special state advantageous to the player different from the advantageous state (for example, a small hitting game state) ) Controllable special state control means (for example, the portion of the game control microcomputer 560 that executes steps S359 to S361) and a special state with a higher frequency of being controlled to the special state (for example, KT state). A possible special state control means (for example, a portion of the game control microcomputer 560 that executes steps S2208A, S2214A, S2220A, S2208B, S2214B, S2220B) , and the starting area is a downflow path through which the game medium flows down. The first area (for example, the left side of the game area 7) of which the specific area (for example, the gate 32) and the variable means are the second path (for example, the game area 7) different from the first path in the downflow path. Provided on the right side), the effect control means is based on the input of the specific entry information when the control is not in the advantageous state (for example, the big hit game state) and is not controlled in the special state, To include a promotion notification unit (for example, a portion of the effect control microcomputer 200 that executes step S684) capable of executing a promotion notification (for example, a left-handed display display) for promoting the emission of the game medium to the first route. May be configured. With such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately execute the promotion notification.

In (unit 4) means 3, the information output means, based on the game medium in the specific area if they are not controlled in a special state enters the first specific entry information (e.g., gate pass 1 specifying command) outputs (e.g., a game control microcomputer 560 executes step S5113 when N in step S5112), based on the game medium in the specific area if it is controlled in a special state enters, first the second specific entry information which is different from the particular entry information (e.g., gate pass 2 specified command) output (e.g., a game control microcomputer 560 executes step S5114 when Y in step S5112), facilitating notification means Is capable of executing the promotion notification based on the input of the first specific approach information when not controlled to the advantageous state (for example, the effect control microcomputer 200 determines Y in step S682, When it is determined to be N in step S683, step S684 is executed). With such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately execute the promotion notification and reduce the processing load on the effect control unit.

In any one of (unit 5) means one of the means 4, normally variable display execution means, special region different from the specific area (for example, plain start winning opening 17) is a game medium (e.g., game balls) enters Based on that, it is possible to execute the variable display of the normal identification information (for example, the normal symbol) (for example, the game control microcomputer 560 determines Y in step S5115 and executes step S5117, and then the step run to), information output means S5100~S5102 is between when the game medium to a special region and when the game medium to a specific region enters entered, to execute different information output process (e.g., a microcomputer for game control 560 may be configured to execute steps S5112 to S5114 when Y in step S5111, and execute step S5116 when Y in step S5115). According to such a configuration, different information output processing is executed depending on the area into which the game medium has entered, so the state can be appropriately notified to the effect control means.

(Means 6) In the means 5, the advantageous state control means controls the special variable means (for example, the special variable winning ball device 20) to the easy entry state (for example, open state) in the advantageous state, and the special area is the specific area. (For example, the gate 32) and the variable means (for example, the variable winning ball device 15) may be provided downstream of the special variable means . According to such a configuration, the game medium can enter the variable means before entering the special area , so that the efficiency of variable display during the special state can be improved and the digestion time of the advantageous state can be extended. ..

(Means 7) In any one of the means 1 to 6, the game control means is a special state control means capable of controlling to a special state advantageous to the player different from the advantageous state (for example, a small hitting game state) ( For example, a part that executes steps S359 to S361 in the game control microcomputer 560 and a special state control means (for example, a game) that can be controlled to a special state (for example, KT state) in which the frequency of being controlled to the special state is increased. (A portion of the control microcomputer 560 that executes steps S2208A, S2214A, S2220A, S2208B, S2214B, S2220B) , and the effect control means promotes the launch of the game medium to a specific area after a predetermined condition is satisfied. Specific promotion notification means (for example, a portion of the production control microcomputer 200 that executes steps S4605 and S4606) capable of executing specific promotion notification (for example, second normal instruction notification, second reduction instruction notification) The promotion notification means does not execute the specific promotion notification when it is controlled to the special state (for example, in the modified example 1, the effect control microcomputer 200 does not shift to the processing of step S4604 or later when Y in step S4603X). ) May be configured. With such a configuration, it is possible to eliminate the annoyance of the effect in the special state while appropriately notifying the trigger of the start of the advantageous state.

(Means 8) In any one of the means 1 to 7, the specific area is provided on a predetermined path (for example, on the right side of the game area 7) of the downflow path along which the game medium flows down, and the effect control means is A predetermined promotion notification (for example, a first normal instruction notification, a first reduction instruction notification) for promoting the emission of the game medium to a predetermined route is executed based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition, and a predetermined operation is performed from the execution of the predetermined promotion notification. Specific promotion notification means (for example, second normal instruction notification, second reduction instruction notification) that can execute the emission of the game medium to the specific area after the elapse of the period (for example, 10 seconds) (for example, the second normal instruction notification, the second reduction instruction notification) The part for executing steps S4404, S4405, S4604, and S4605 in the effect control microcomputer 200) may be included. According to such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately notify the trigger for controlling to the advantageous state while suppressing the complexity of the effect.

It is the front view which saw the pachinko game machine from the front. It is a front view of a special variable winning ball device included in the pachinko gaming machine. It is a perspective view of the special variable winning ball device provided in the pachinko gaming machine in a closed state. It is a perspective view of the special variable winning ball device provided in the pachinko gaming machine in an open state. It is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration example of a game control board (main board). It is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration example of a relay board, a performance control board, a lamp driver board, and a sound output board. It is a flow chart which shows main processing. It is a flowchart which shows a timer interruption process. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is explanatory drawing which shows a big hit determination table and a small hit determination table. It is an explanatory view showing a jackpot type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern (variation time) of a special design and a decorative design. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern (variation time) of a special design and a decorative design. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern (variation time) of a special design and a decorative design. It is an explanatory view for explaining an opening pattern of a variable winning a prize ball device and a special variable winning a prize ball device in a KT state. It is the explanation drawing which shows one example of the contents of production control command. It is the explanation drawing which shows one example of the contents of production control command. It is a flowchart showing a first special symbol process processing. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st starting opening switch passage processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a storage buffer. It is a flowchart showing a first special symbol normal process. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st variation pattern setting processing. It is a flowchart showing a process during the first special symbol variation in the first special symbol process process. It is a flowchart showing a first special symbol stop process. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st gate passage waiting processing. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st big winning opening pre-processing. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st big hit end processing. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st big hit end processing. It is a flowchart showing a second special symbol process processing. It is a flowchart showing a second special symbol normal process. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd big hit end processing. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd big hit end processing. It is an explanatory view for explaining how to transition the gaming state. It is a flow chart showing an example of a program of special symbol display control processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of a normal symbol process processing. It is a flowchart showing a normal symbol normal process. It is a flowchart showing a normal symbol variation process. It is a flowchart showing a normal symbol stop process. It is a flowchart which shows a normal electric auditors product pre-opening process. It is a flowchart which shows a normal electric auditors product operating process. It is the flowchart which shows the main processing which the production control microcomputer executes. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a command receiving buffer. It is a flow chart which shows a concrete example of command analysis processing. It is a flow chart which shows a concrete example of command analysis processing. It is a flow chart which shows a concrete example of command analysis processing. It is a flow chart which shows a concrete example of command analysis processing. It is a flow chart which shows a concrete example of command analysis processing. It is a flow chart which shows processing at the time of receipt of a confirmation command. It is a flow chart which shows background design process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an instruction alerting control process. It is a flow chart which shows demonstration display control processing. It is a flow chart which shows demonstration display control processing. It is a flowchart showing a background symbol variation start waiting process. It is a flow chart which shows background pattern variation start processing. It is a flow chart which shows processing during background design change. It is a flowchart which shows a background symbol fluctuation stop process. It is a flowchart which shows a background symbol fluctuation stop process. It is the flowchart which shows the big hit end production processing. It is a flow chart which shows processing during a small hit. It is an explanatory view for explaining a display example of a right hit display in a high probability/second KT state. It is an explanatory view for explaining a display example of a full tank error notification. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display of the instruction|indication notification in this Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display of the instruction|indication notification in this Embodiment. It is a timing chart when the big hit game state ends and is controlled to the first KT state. 9 is a flowchart showing an instruction notification control process in the first modification. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the production|generation control command in the modification 2. 11 is a flowchart showing a prize ball number display processing in Modification 3; 11 is a flowchart showing a prize ball number display processing in Modification 3; 11 is a flowchart showing a prize ball number display processing in Modification 3; 11 is a flowchart showing a prize ball number display processing in Modification 3; It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production aspect of the prize ball increase production in the modified example 3. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production aspect of the prize ball increase production in the modified example 3. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production aspect of the prize ball increase production in the modified example 3. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production aspect of the prize ball increase production in the modified example 3. It is a timing chart for explaining the effect timing of the effect in the small hit game during the second KT state in Modification 3.

Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of a pachinko gaming machine 1, which is an example of a gaming machine, will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko game machine (ball game machine) 1 as viewed from the front. Although a pachinko gaming machine is shown here as an example of the gaming machine, the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine, and may be, for example, an image-type gaming machine, a coin gaming machine, or a slot machine. Good.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is composed of an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically long rectangular shape, and a game frame that is openably and closably attached to the inside of the outer frame. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a frame-shaped glass door frame 2 which is openably and closably provided in the game frame. The game frame includes a front frame (not shown) installed to be openable and closable with respect to the outer frame, a mechanism plate (not shown) to which mechanical parts and the like are attached, and various parts attached to them (game described later). (Excluding the board 6).

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a glass door frame 2 formed in a frame shape. On the lower surface of the glass door frame 2, there is a hit ball supply plate (upper plate) 3. Below the hitting ball supply tray 3, there are provided a surplus ball receiving tray 4 for storing game balls that cannot be stored in the hitting ball feed tray 3 and a hitting ball operation handle (operation knob) 5 for firing the hit ball. A game board 6 is detachably attached to the back surface of the glass door frame 2. The game board 6 is a structure including a plate-shaped body that constitutes the game board 6 and various parts attached to the plate-shaped body. Further, on the front surface of the game board 6, a game area 7 in which the driven game balls can flow down is formed.

Near the center of the game area 7, a performance display device 9 composed of a liquid crystal display device (LCD) is provided. On the display screen of the effect display device 9, there are a plurality of types that can identify each of them based on the establishment of the first starting condition that is the first execution condition (for example, that the hit ball has won the first starting winning opening 13). A display area (hereinafter referred to as a first variable display portion 9a) for variably displaying a decorative design (first decorative design) for performance and deriving and displaying a display result, and a second starting condition which is a second execution condition are satisfied. A display area for variably displaying a plurality of types of decorative design for production (second decorative design) capable of identifying each of them based on (for example, that the hit ball has won the second starting winning opening 14) and deriving and displaying the display result. (Hereinafter, referred to as the second variable display portion 9b.), and a display area (hereinafter, background pattern) in which it is easier for the player to visually recognize the display content than the first variable display portion 9a and the second variable display portion 9b. Display section 9c). It should be noted that it is easy to visually recognize the display content, for example, because the display area is large in size, or the display content on the variable display section 9a and the second variable display section 9b is always monochrome. The display color may change. Further, in this embodiment, the background design effecting section 9c is controlled to display identification information (hereinafter, also referred to as a background design) in three display areas of left, middle, and right. It should be noted that the winning is that a game ball has entered a predetermined winning area such as a winning opening. Derivatively displaying the display result means stopping and displaying the symbol. In this embodiment, one background symbol effecting unit 9c is provided for the two variable display units (the first variable display unit 9a and the second variable display unit 9b), and in the background symbol effecting unit 9c, 2 Since the effect corresponding to one of the decorative patterns (the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern) variably displayed on the one variable display unit is executed, the situation of the decorative pattern (for example, whether the jackpot pattern is derived and displayed) It's hard to understand. In this embodiment, the background symbol is for performing the variable display of the symbol for the effect on the effect display device 9 (liquid crystal display device), and corresponds to the effect identification information, the decorative symbol, and the effect symbol. ..

On the left side of the effect display device 9, there is provided a movable member 78 for effect that is operable so as to cover a part of the display screen of the effect display device 9. In this embodiment, the movable member 78 is operated by driving the movable member motor 78a by the effect control microcomputer 200. Further, on the left side of the effect display device 9, an origin position sensor 78b for detecting that the movable member 78 is at the origin position is provided.

At the upper part of the effect display device 9, a first special symbol display device (special symbol display device) 8a and a second special symbol display device 8b that variably display special symbols as identification information are provided. In this embodiment, the first special symbol display device 8a and the second special symbol display device 8b are each realized by a simple and small-sized display device (for example, 7-segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0-9, for example. Has been done. Hereinafter, the identification information variably displayed on the first special symbol display 8a is referred to as a first special symbol, and the identification information variably displayed on the second special symbol display 8b may be referred to as a second special symbol. Further, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol.

In the vicinity of the first special symbol display device 8a, the number of effective winning balls that have entered the first starting winning opening 13, that is, the first reserved memory number (reserved memory is also referred to as starting memory or starting winning memory) is displayed. The 1st special symbol reservation storage indicator 18a which consists of 4 indicators is provided. The 1st special symbol reservation storage indicator 18a increases the number of the indicator which lights up each time there is an effective starting prize. Then, each time the variable display on the first special symbol display device 8a is started, the number of lighted display devices is reduced by one. Further, in the vicinity of the second special symbol display device 8b, a second special symbol reserved memory display device 18b composed of four display devices for displaying the number of effective winning balls that have entered the second starting winning opening 14, that is, the reserved memory number. It is provided. The second special symbol reservation storage display 18b increases the number of display devices to be turned on by 1 each time there is an effective start winning. Then, each time the variable display on the second special symbol display device 8b is started, the number of lighted display devices is reduced by one.

The first variable display unit 9a performs variable display of a decorative symbol as a decorative (for effect) symbol during the variable display time of the special symbol by the first special symbol indicator 8a. Further, the second variable display portion 9b performs variable display of a decorative symbol as a decorative symbol during the variable display time of the special symbol by the second special symbol indicator 8b. The 1st variable display part 9a and the 2nd variable display part 9b which perform variable display of a decorative design are controlled by the microcomputer for effect control mounted in the effect control board. Hereinafter, the identification information variably displayed on the first variable display portion 9a may be referred to as a first decorative pattern, and the identification information variably displayed on the second variable display portion 9b may be referred to as a second decorative pattern. Further, the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern may be collectively referred to as a decorative pattern. The type of the first decorative design and the type of the second decorative design may be the same (for example, both are numbers 0 to 9) or may be different. If the types are different, some may be different. As an example, the first decorative design type includes numbers 0 to 5 and non-numeric characters, and the second decorative design type is numbers 0 to 5 and non-numeric characters and is the first decorative design. Character different from the above character may be included.

On the display screen of the effect display device 9, the number of effective winning balls that have entered the first starting winning opening 13, that is, the first reserved memory number, and the number of effective winning balls that have entered the second starting winning opening 14, that is, the second reserved memory number. There is an area (hereinafter, referred to as a symbol reserved storage display unit 18c) for displaying the total number (total reserved storage number) which is the sum of the above. As described above, in this embodiment, by displaying the total of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number in the symbol reserved memory display portion 18c relatively visible to the player, the player can: It is difficult to grasp each of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number. In this embodiment, the first special symbol hold storage indicator 18a and the second special symbol hold memory indicator 18b are four indicators such as lamps and LEDs smaller than the symbol hold memory indicator 18c, respectively. Although configured, a display device of another mode may be used in order to make it more difficult to grasp the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number. As an example, the first special symbol reserved memory display 18a and the second special symbol reserved memory display 18b are each configured by one display device, and the display color is changed or the display density is changed depending on the number of reserved memories. I will let you.

In this embodiment, the upper limit value of the total number of display pending storages, that is, the total number of display pending storages is 8. The symbol reservation storage display unit 18c increases the number of display areas to be turned on by 1 each time there is an effective start winning. Then, each time the variable display of the first special symbol display device 8a or the second special symbol display device 8b is started, the number of display areas to be turned on is reduced by one. Alternatively, of the eight display areas in the symbol reserve storage display section 18c, the number of areas displayed in a color determined in advance as an effective start winning is increased by one. Then, each time the variable display of the first special symbol display device 8a or the second special symbol display device 8b is started, the number of regions displayed in a color determined in advance as an effective start winning is reduced by one.

Further, in this embodiment, the upper limit value of the first reserved storage number is set to 4 and the upper limit value of the second reserved storage number is set to 4. Accordingly, when the first reserved memory number is 4 and a game ball is won in the first start winning hole 13, the win is an invalid start winning that does not satisfy the first starting condition. When a game ball is won in the first starting winning opening 13 when the first reserved memory number is less than 4, the winning is an effective starting winning (first effective starting winning) that satisfies the first starting condition. Similarly, when the second reserved memory number is 4 and a game ball is won in the second starting winning opening 14, the winning is an invalid starting winning that does not satisfy the second starting condition. When the second reserved memory number is less than 4 and a game ball is won in the second starting winning opening 14, the winning is an effective starting winning (second effective starting winning) that satisfies the second starting condition. In this example, the upper limit value of the first reserved storage number is set to 4, the upper limit value of the second reserved storage number is set to 4, and the upper limit value of the summed reserved storage number is set to 8. However, those values are merely examples. .. Further, the upper limit value may be changeable according to the gaming state.

On the lower left side of the effect display device 9, a winning device having a first starting winning opening 13 is provided. The game ball that has won the first starting winning opening 13 is guided to the back surface of the game board 6 and detected by the first starting opening switch 13a. When a game ball is detected by the first start opening switch 13a, a predetermined number (one) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball based on this detection information.

Further, a row of nails 19 is provided on the right side of the first start winning opening 13, and the game balls flowing down from the right side of the game area 7 do not enter the area where the first starting winning opening 13 is provided. Is configured. As described above, in this embodiment, the first start winning port 13 is provided on the left side of the game area 7 and the nail for preventing the game ball flowing down from the right side of the game area 7 from entering. Since the row 19 is provided, the game ball can be won in the first start winning port 13 only when the game ball is operated to aim at the left side of the game area 7.

In addition, in this embodiment, the first starting winning opening 13 is provided on the left side of the game area 7 and the row 19 of nails is also provided, but only in such a mode. I can't. For example, the first starting winning opening 13 may be provided only on the left side of the game area 7 and the row 19 of nails may not be provided, or the nailing may be provided on the right side of the first starting winning opening 13. The first starting winning opening 13 itself may be provided near the center of the game area 7 only by providing the row 19.

A gate 32 is provided on the right side of the effect display device 9. The game ball that has passed through the gate 32 is detected by the gate switch 32a. Further, below the gate 32, a normal starting winning opening 17 is provided. The game ball that has passed through the normal starting winning opening 17 is detected by the normal starting opening switch 17a. When the game ball is detected by the normal starting opening switch 17a, a predetermined number (for example, one) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball based on this detection information.

Below the normal start winning opening 17, a special variable winning ball device 20 that forms a big winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 20 includes an opening/closing plate, and when the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 8a, the specific display result (big hit symbol) on the second special symbol display device 8b. In the advantageous state (big hit game state) that occurs when is displayed and displayed, the open/close plate is controlled by the solenoid 21 to be in the open state, so that the big winning opening, which is the winning area, is in the open state. The game ball that has won the special winning opening is detected by the first count switch 23a. When a game ball is detected by the first count switch 23a, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball based on the detection information.

Below the special variable winning ball device 20, a special variable winning ball device 22 forming a special winning port 24 for a small hit, and a variable winning ball device 15 having a second starting winning port 14 are provided. As shown in FIG. 1, the special variable winning ball device 22 is arranged on the left side, and the variable winning ball device 15 is arranged adjacent to the right side. As will be described later in detail, the special variable winning ball device 22 and the variable winning ball device 15 extend in the left-right direction in a slightly inclined state, and are plate-shaped bottom surfaces formed as the bottom surface of the flow path through which the game balls flow down. By moving the member back and forth, the special winning opening 24 and the second starting winning opening 14 located below the bottom member are in an open state (also called an open state) in which the game ball can be won and the game ball is won. It is changed to an impossible closed state (also called a closed state). The special variable winning ball device 22 moves the bottom surface member forward in the small hitting game state that occurs when the predetermined display result (small hitting pattern) is displayed on the second special symbol display device 8b. The bottom member is moved backward from the closed state, and the opening control is performed to open the special winning opening 24, which is the winning area. Further, the variable winning ball device 15 moves the bottom member backward toward the rear from the closed state in which the bottom member is moved forward toward the front when the normal symbol display device 10 hits and displays the symbol, The opening control for opening the second start winning opening 14 which is the winning area is executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, the special variable winning ball device 22 and the variable winning ball device 15 are formed to have the same structure, but as shown in FIG. Compared with, the special variable winning ball device 22 is slightly larger. Further, as shown in FIG. 1, since the special variable winning ball device 22 and the variable winning ball device 15 are arranged adjacent to each other, the special variable winning ball device 20 is dropped in the game area 7 without winning. The game ball first drops onto the variable winning ball device 15, but at this time, if the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 15 is moved backward and the second start winning port 14 is in the open state, The game ball wins the second start winning hole 14, and the game ball does not flow toward the special variable winning ball device 22. On the other hand, if the second start winning port 14 is not open, the game ball moves on the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 15 and is guided to the special variable winning ball device 22. At this time, if the bottom member of the special variable winning ball device 22 is moved backward and the special winning opening 24 is in the open state, the game ball wins the special winning opening 24. Furthermore, if the special winning opening 24 is also not open, the game ball moves on the bottom member of the special variable winning ball device 22 and drops to the outlet 26 as it is.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, the special variable winning ball device 22 is arranged on the left side and the variable winning ball device 15 is arranged on the right side. The bottom member of the variable winning ball device 15 is formed so as to gently incline from the upper right to the lower left, and when the bottom member is not retracted and is in the closed state, the variable winning ball device 15 has a special variable winning prize. Since the game ball is configured to flow toward the ball device 22, in this sense, the variable winning ball device 15 is provided on the upstream side, and the special variable winning ball device 22 is on the downstream side. It can be said that it is provided.

Inside the special winning opening 24, there is provided a switch (second count switch 25a, see FIG. 5) capable of detecting a game ball winning in the special winning opening 24. When a game ball is detected by the second count switch 25a, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball based on this detection information. Here, when the game ball passes (enters) the special winning opening 24 that is opened in the special variable winning ball device 22, the number of the winning balls is smaller than that when the gaming ball wins the big winning opening. For example, more prize balls are paid out than when the game balls pass (enter) other prize holes such as the first start prize hole 13a and the second start prize hole 13b. Therefore, if the special variable winning ball device 22 is controlled to be opened and the special winning opening 24 is opened, it becomes a state advantageous to the player. On the other hand, if the special variable winning ball device 22 is closed and the special winning opening 24 is closed, the game ball cannot be passed (entered) into the special winning opening 24 to obtain the prize ball. Will be disadvantageous to the person.

Further, in the second starting winning opening 14, a second starting opening switch 14a capable of detecting a game ball that has been won in the second starting winning opening 14 is provided. When a game ball is detected by the second starting opening switch 14a, a predetermined number (one) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball based on this detection information.

Hereinafter, the first start winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 may be collectively referred to as a starting winning opening or a starting opening.

In this embodiment, the gate 32, the normal starting winning opening 17, the special variable winning ball device 20 (large winning opening), the variable winning ball device 15 (second starting winning opening 14), and the special variable winning ball device 22. Since the (special winning opening 24) is provided on the right side of the game area 7, during the big hit game or in the KT state described later, the player aims at the right side of the game area 7 to perform a shooting operation ( So-called right-handed operation).

In addition, in the present embodiment, the time required for the game ball to reach the variable winning ball device 15 after passing through the gate 32 is configured to be 0.6 seconds or more. Specifically, it is adjusted by the installation positions of the gate 32 and the variable winning ball device 32, and a group of nails forming a flow path of the game ball. As will be described later in detail, in the present embodiment, the variable winning ball device 15 can be controlled to be in an open state based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the gate 32 (however, in this embodiment, a normal start winning prize is provided). The variable winning ball device 15 may be controlled to be in an open state based on the fact that the gaming ball has won in the mouth 17). In the first KT state described later, the variable winning ball device 15 passes after the gaming ball passes through the gate 32. Is 0.5 seconds until it is controlled to an open state, and is less than 0.6 seconds which is the time required for the game ball to reach the variable winning ball device 15 after passing through the gate 32. Since it is short, if the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to be in an open state when one gaming ball passes through the gate 32 in the first KT state, the one gaming ball can be directly won in the variable winning ball device 15. Has become.

Below the effect display device 9, a normal symbol display device 10 that variably displays normal symbols is provided. In this embodiment, the normal symbol display device 10 is realized by a simple and small-sized display device (for example, 7-segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0-9.

When the game ball passes through the gate 32 and is detected by the gate switch 32a, or when the game ball enters the normal start winning opening 17 and is detected by the normal starting opening switch 17a, the variable display of the display of the normal symbol display device 10 Is started. And when the stop symbol in the normal symbol display device 10 is a predetermined symbol (hit symbol. For example, symbol “7”), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for a predetermined time. That is, the state of the variable winning ball device 15 is an advantageous state from a disadvantageous state to the player (a state where the game ball can be won in the second starting winning port 14) when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol. Changes to. In the vicinity of the normal symbol display device 10, a normal symbol hold storage display device having a display unit with four LEDs for displaying the total number of winning balls that have passed through the gate 32 and the normal starting winning port 17. 41 is provided. Every time there is a passage of the game ball to the gate 32 or a prize for the game ball to the normal start winning hole 17, that is, every time the game ball is detected by the gate switch 32a or the normal winning hole switch 17a, the normal symbol reserved memory display The device 41 increases the number of LEDs to be turned on by one. Then, every time the variable display of the normal symbol display device 10 is started, the number of LEDs to be turned on is reduced by 1.

In addition, in this embodiment, since the variable display of the normal symbol is executed based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the gate 32, the gate 32 normally plays a role as a starting region, which will be described later. As described above, even when the big hit symbol is derived and displayed, the big hit game state is entered based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the gate 32, so that the gate 32 also plays a role as an operation area. Therefore, the gate 32 is configured as a dual-purpose gate that normally serves both as a starting region and an operating region.

Around the left and right sides of the game area 7 of the game board 6, there are provided decorative lamps 25 that are displayed blinking during the game, and at the bottom there is an outlet 26 into which hit balls that have not been won are taken. Further, two speakers 27 for producing a sound effect or a voice as a predetermined voice output are provided on the upper left and right sides outside the game area 7. A top frame lamp 28a, a left frame lamp 28b, and a right frame lamp 28c provided on the front frame are provided on the outer peripheral upper part, the outer peripheral left part, and the outer peripheral right part of the game area 7. In addition, a prize ball lamp 51 that lights up when there is a remaining number of prize balls is provided near the left frame lamp 28b, and a ball out lamp 52 that lights up when the supply ball runs out is provided near the right frame lamp 28c. It is provided.

The game machine drives a drive motor in response to a player operating a hit ball operation handle 5, and uses a rotational force of the drive motor to shoot a game ball into a game area 7 (not shown). ) Is provided. When the player continuously operates the hit ball operation handle 5, the game ball is launched every 0.6 seconds. The game ball shot from the hit ball launching device enters the game area 7 through a hit ball rail formed in a circular shape so as to surround the game area 7, and then comes down the game area 7. When the game ball enters the first starting winning opening 13 and is detected by the first starting opening switch 13a, if the variable display of the first special symbol can be started (for example, the jackpot game end or the previous variable display ends). However, that the first start condition is satisfied), the variable display (variation) of the first special symbol is started in the first special symbol display portion 8a, and the variable display of the first decorative symbol is displayed in the variable display portion 9a. Be started. That is, the first special symbol corresponds to the winning of the first starting winning opening 13. If it is not a state where the variable display of the first special symbol can be started, on the condition that the first reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value, the total reserved memory number (total number) displayed on the symbol reserved memory display portion 18c Increase by 1.

Further, when the game ball enters the second starting winning opening 14 and is detected by the second starting opening switch 14a, if the variable display of the second special symbol can be started (for example, the jackpot game end or the previous variable display). Ends, that the second start condition is established), and the variable display (fluctuation) of the second special symbol is started on the second special symbol display portion 8b, and the second decorative symbol is displayed on the second variable display portion 9b. The variable display of is started. That is, the second special symbol corresponds to the winning of the second starting winning opening 14. Unless it is a state where the variable display of the second special symbol can be started, the total reserved memory number (total number) displayed on the symbol reserved memory display portion 18c on condition that the second reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value. Increase by 1. However, even if the second reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value, if the combined reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value, the total number displayed on the symbol reserved storage display portion 18c is increased by one.

The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and the variable display of the first decorative symbol on the first variable display portion 9a are stopped when a predetermined time has elapsed. When the first special symbol at the time of stop becomes a big hit symbol (specific display result), it shifts to the big hit game state. That is, the special variable winning ball device 20 is opened until a fixed time (for example, 29 seconds) elapses or until a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are won in the special winning opening. One round in the jackpot gaming state is until a certain period of time elapses after the special variable winning ball device 20 is opened, or until a predetermined number (for example, 10) of hit balls is won in the special winning opening. When a predetermined number of game balls are won in the special winning opening or when a certain period of time elapses after the special variable winning ball device 20 is opened, the continuation right is generated and the special variable winning ball device 20 is opened again. The continuation right can be generated a predetermined number of times (for example, 2 rounds, 6 rounds, 16 rounds). Alternatively, a V winning area may be provided in the special winning opening, and the continuation right may be generated on condition that the hit ball wins the V winning area while the special variable winning ball device 20 is open. The number of rounds in the big hit game state varies depending on the type of big hit. In the present embodiment, the types of big hits are 2R normal big hit, 2R certainty variation big hit, 6R regular big hit, 6R certainty variation big hit, and 16R certainty variation big hit. For example, if 2R regular big hit or 2R certainty variation big hit occurs, two round big hit game State is given, 6R normal big hit or 6R certainty variation big hit occurs, 2 round big hit game state is given, 16R certain variation big hit occurs, 16 round big hit game state is given.

In the case where it is determined that the stop symbol at the time of the variation stop of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a is a jackpot symbol with special variation (special display result: probability variation symbol, for example, "7") Is a probability change state with a higher probability of being a big hit next (there is a low probability/non-KT state and a low probability/the first KT state described later) (a high probability that a big hit is more likely to occur than a low probability state) The state is advantageous for the player. In addition, when the stop symbol of the first special symbol is determined to be the probability variation symbol and shifts to the probability variation state, not only the probability that the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a becomes a jackpot symbol becomes high, The probability that the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b becomes a big hit symbol also becomes high. That is, not only in the determination of the big hit based on the first starting prize, but also in the determination of the big hit based on the second starting prize, it is determined that the big hit has a higher probability than the low probability state.

Further, the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b and the variable display of the second decorative symbol on the second variable display portion 9b are stopped when a predetermined time has elapsed. When the second special symbol at the time of stop becomes a big hit symbol (specific display result), it shifts to the big hit game state.

When it is determined that the stop symbol at the time of fluctuation stop of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b is a jackpot symbol with special variation (special display result: probability variation symbol, for example, "7"). Is a probability change state with a higher probability of being a big hit next (there is a low probability/non-KT state and a low probability/the first KT state described later) (a high probability that a big hit is more likely to occur than a low probability state) The state is advantageous for the player. In addition, when the stop symbol of the second special symbol is determined to be the probability variation symbol and shifts to the probability variation state, not only the probability that the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b becomes a jackpot symbol becomes high, The probability that the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a becomes a big hit symbol also becomes high. That is, not only in the determination of the big hit based on the second starting prize, but also in the determination of the big hit based on the first starting prize, the big hit is determined with a higher probability than the low probability state.

Moreover, when the second special symbol at the time of stop becomes a small hit symbol, it shifts to a small hit game state. That is, the special variable winning ball device 22 is opened until a certain time period during which a game ball can be won in the special winning opening 24 has elapsed. As a result, even in the small hitting game state, the opening mode is provided so that the player can obtain a payout, although it is less than the large hitting game state.

In the probability variation state, as described above, the stop symbols of the first special symbol and the second special symbol that are variably displayed on the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b are jackpot symbols (specific display result: , 0 to 9) is more likely than the low probability state.

Here, the game state in the present embodiment will be described. First, the gaming state in the present embodiment has a normal state (low probability/non-KT state) and a KT state (so-called small hit time) that is more likely to be a small hit than the normal state. Furthermore, there are two types of KT state, a first KT state and a second KT state, and in this embodiment, the gaming state is a low probability state and a non-KT state (low probability/non-KT state: normal state). In the case of being controlled, in the case of being controlled to the low probability and the first KT state (low probability/first KT state), and in the case of being controlled to the high probability and the first KT state (high probability/first KT state). In some cases, the probability is high and the second KT state (high probability/second KT state) is controlled.

In the first KT state among the KT states, as will be described later, although a small hit is likely to occur and the special variable winning ball device 22 is likely to be in an open state, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 on the upstream side is extremely long and a small hit. Even if occurs, there are very few cases where a game ball is won in the special variable winning ball device 22 on the downstream side (for example, about 1 ball for every 100 changes). Specifically, in the first KT state, it is controlled to a state where a small hit is likely to occur, and is controlled to a high base state so that the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for a long time. As will be described later, the second KT state in the KT state has a short open time of the upstream variable winning ball device 15, and when a small hit occurs, the game ball is placed in the special variable winning ball device 22 on the downstream side. Easy to win. Specifically, in the second KT state, it is controlled to a state in which a small hit is likely to occur and is also controlled to a low base state so that the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 is shortened.

The probability variation state is a gaming state that is more likely to be a big hit than the low probability state. Specifically, since the number of big hit determination values in the big hit determination table in the probability variation state is 10 times the number of big hit determination values in the big hit determination table in the low probability state, the probability variation occurrence in the big hit determination table is larger than that in the low probability state. The game state is easy to play.

Also, the KT state is a gaming state in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state (low probability/non-KT state). Specifically, in this embodiment, the probability that the variable winning ball device 15 will be in the open state in the case of a normal figure is higher in the KT state than in the normal state. And, while there is no case where it is determined as a small hit when the first special symbol changes, it is configured so that it may be determined as a small hit when the second special symbol changes (however, compulsory described later). Therefore, the KT state is set to a gaming state in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state. As a result, in the KT state, a small hit is frequently generated mainly by changing the second special symbol, which is a game state advantageous to the player.

It should be noted that the configuration for setting the KT state in the gaming state in which a small hit is more likely than in the normal state is not limited to this. For example, even in the KT state, the probability that the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state and is in the open state is the same as in the normal state (for example, 10% or 100%), but when the second special symbol changes. By configuring the variation time of the selected variation pattern to be shorter in the KT state than in the normal state, the KT state has a higher rate of variation times for a certain period of time than the normal state, and the KT state is in the normal state. It may be a game state in which a small hit is more likely to occur.

The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and the variable display of the first decorative symbol on the first variable display portion 9a are synchronized. Further, the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b and the variable display of the second decorative symbol on the second variable display portion 9b are synchronized. Here, the synchronization means that the variable display start time and the variable display time are the same, and the variable display period is the same. When the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first variable display portion 9a. When the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the second variable display portion 9b.

Further, when the probability variation symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 8a, a decorative pattern (for example, "7") that recalls the probability variation symbol is stopped and displayed on the first variable display portion 9a. When the probability variation symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display device 8b, a special decorative pattern (for example, "7") that recalls the probability variation symbol is stopped and displayed on the second variable display portion 9b.

In the background symbol display portion 9c, when the first special symbol is variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 8a, an effect corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol is executed. For example, the background symbols are variably displayed in the three display areas of the background symbol display portion 9c. When performing the reach effect, for example, the left and right background patterns are stopped and displayed during variable display. Then, although there are exceptions as will be described later, when the stop symbol of the first special symbol is basically derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 8a, the stop symbol of the background symbol is derived on the background symbol display portion 9c. The background pattern is finally stopped in the three display areas. When the stop symbol of the first special symbol is a big hit symbol, the stop symbol of the background symbol is a background symbol (for example, left, which reminds the player that the stop symbol of the first special symbol is a big hit symbol). It becomes three background patterns with the middle right aligned. Hereinafter, such a background design is also called a big hit design.

When the second special symbol is variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 8b, an effect corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. For example, the background symbols are variably displayed in the three display areas of the background symbol display portion 9c.

Further, the first special symbol is variably displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, and at the same time, the second special symbol is variably displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The effect corresponding to any one of the variable displays is executed.

Then, when the first special symbol or the second special symbol is variably displayed alone, the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol ends and the stop symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is ended. When is displayed as a derivation display, the variable display of the background design is ended, and the stop design of the background design is displayed as a derivation display. Moreover, when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variably displayed at the same time, specifically, when there is a period in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variably displayed at the same time, it is late. When the special symbol for which the variable display ends is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the background symbol ends.

Next, the reach display mode (reach) will be described. The reach display mode (reach) in this embodiment is a variable display (variable display) for the background symbols which are not yet stopped when the stopped background symbol of the three background symbols constitutes a part of the jackpot symbol. ) Is performed, and all or some of the background symbols are in a state of being variably displayed in synchronization while constituting all or part of the big hit symbols.

For example, in the state where the decorative symbol (for example, "7") that is a part of the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the left and right display regions of the left, middle, and right display regions in the background symbol display unit 9c. The display area in the middle is in a state of being variably displayed, and the state in which all or part of the symbols in the display area are variably displayed in synchronization while constituting all or part of the jackpot symbol (for example, the background). The left, middle, and right display areas of the symbol display portion 9c are variably displayed, and the variably display is always performed with the same symbols being aligned. This is the reach display mode or reach.

In addition, at the time of reach, an effect different from usual is performed with a lamp or a sound. The effect and the reach display mode in the background pattern display portion 9c are referred to as reach effect. In addition, at the time of reach, a character (a representation display imitating a person or the like and different from the background pattern) is displayed, or the background of the background pattern display portion 9c (a background color or pattern different from the pattern and the character). Etc.), the display mode (for example, color) may be changed.

Next, FIGS. 2 to 4 are views showing the special variable winning ball device 22. The special variable winning ball device 22 will be described below with reference to FIGS. 2 to 4. Although the structure of the special variable winning ball device 22 is described with reference to FIGS. 2 to 4 in this embodiment, the size of the special variable winning ball device 22 is slightly smaller than that of the special variable winning ball device 22. The structure of the ball device 15 is similar to that of the special variable winning ball device 22.

As shown in FIGS. 2 to 4, the special variable winning ball device 22 includes a base plate portion 101 having a rectangular plate shape that is long in the left-right direction. The special variable winning ball device 22 is fixedly supported in the game area 7 by fixing the base plate portion 101 to the game area 7 with, for example, a screw. A special winning opening 24 (the second starting winning opening 14 in the case of the variable winning ball device 15) that opens forward is formed in a substantially central region of the base plate portion 101, and the special winning portion of the base plate portion 101 is formed. A slit-shaped accommodation hole 102 that is long in the left-right direction for accommodating the bottom surface member 23 on the back side (rear side) of the game area 7 is formed at a position above the mouth 24 when the bottom surface member 23 moves backward. Has been done. In the present embodiment, the special winning opening 24 is formed slightly to the left of the center of the base plate 101 in the left-right direction, but may be left or right of this.

The bottom surface member 23 is inclined downward to the left so that the game ball that has entered the upper surface from the right side is made to flow down toward the left, and the accommodation hole 102 is inclined downward to the left so as to follow the inclination of the bottom surface member 23. Is formed. The bottom surface member 23 can be moved back and forth between a forwardly moved state shown in FIG. 3 and a backwardly moved state shown in FIG. 4, and the bottom surface member 23 is provided on the back side (rear side) of the base plate portion 101. A drive device (not shown) for moving back and forth is arranged.

Returning to FIGS. 2 to 4, on the front side of the base plate portion 101, a flow passage forming base 112 protruding forward is formed, and on the upper portion of the flow passage forming base 112, a forward movement is performed. The upstream region 23U, which is the upper end portion (right end portion) of the bottom member 23 in the opened state, is connected in the longitudinal direction of the bottom member 23, and forms the flow path of the game ball together with the bottom member 23; The downstream region 23L, which is the lower end (left end) of the bottom member 23, is connected in the longitudinal direction of the bottom member 23, and the downstream passage 114 that forms a passage for the game ball together with the bottom member 23 is formed. There is.

In addition, in the upper part of the flow path formation base 112, the upper end of the upstream flow path 113 and the downstream flow path 114 is recessed downward from the bottom member 23 side end, and the special winning opening 24 is left and right in front view. A guide flow path portion 115 that guides the game ball that has fallen below the bottom surface member 23 to the special winning opening 24 is formed so as to surround it from below.

The upstream side flow passage portion 113 and the downstream side flow passage portion 114 are formed so as to incline downward to the left so that the game ball flows down to the left. Further, the bottom portion of the guide flow path portion 115 extends downward to the left toward the special winning opening 24 side and is recessed at a position in front of the special winning opening 24. Then, in the recessed space at the bottom of the guide flow path portion 115, a triangular guide portion 116 for guiding the game ball toward the special winning opening 24 side (back side of the game area 7) is provided. ing.

Furthermore, the front part (player side) of the flow path forming base 112 is integrally formed with a covering portion 117 that covers the upstream flow path portion 113, the downstream flow path portion 114, and the guide flow path portion 115 from the front. Has been done. This covering part 117 covers the upstream side flow path part 113, the downstream side flow path part 114 and the guide flow path part 115 from the front, so that the game balls flowing down through these flow path parts bounce toward the glass door frame 4 side. It has a function to prevent it from being lost. In addition, in the present embodiment, the covering 117 is integrally formed with the flow path forming base 112, but may be fixed separately.

In the special variable winning ball device 22, between the base plate portion 101 and the covering portion 117, the flow of the game spheres which are continuous in the left-right direction and which is composed of the upstream side flow passage portion 113, the bottom surface member 23, and the downstream side flow passage portion 114. The path F is formed. Here, in the present embodiment, the base plate portion 101 and the covering portion 117 are formed with a plurality of restriction pieces 118 that reduce the flow-down speed of the game balls flowing down the flow path F.

In the present embodiment, the restricting piece 118 is integrally formed with the base plate portion 101 and the covering portion 117, and is formed in a rib shape that protrudes forward from the base plate portion 101 or protrudes rearward from the covering portion 117. By interfering with, by changing the downflow direction of the game ball so that the game ball flowing down to the left meanders with the movement of the front-back direction component, the time required for the downflow of the game ball is not provided with the restriction piece 118. Delay more than. These restricting pieces 118 are formed so as to be lined up at a predetermined interval in the flow-down direction of the game balls in the flow path F, and are alternately formed on the base plate portion 101 and the covering portion 117. Further, the restriction piece 118 is set to have a width dimension of about 1/3 to 1/4 of the width of the bottom surface member 23 in the front-rear direction, and a width dimension that allows a game ball to pass between adjacent pieces. There is. More specifically, in the present embodiment, one restricting piece 118 is formed in a portion of the covering portion 117 that covers the upstream passage portion 113 from the front, and the downstream passage portion of the covering portion 117 is formed. One restricting piece 118 is formed in a portion that covers 114 from the front. In addition, a total of five restricting pieces 118 that are alternately formed on the base plate portion 101 and the covering portion 117 are formed on a portion of the base plate portion 101 and the covering portion 117 that covers the bottom surface member 23. The number of such restriction pieces 118 is not particularly limited. In addition, in the present embodiment, most of the restriction piece 118 is covered by the covering portion 117 from the front (player side).

With the arrangement of the restriction pieces 118 as described above, referring to FIG. 3, the special variable winning ball apparatus 22 (and the variable winning ball apparatus 15 similarly configured) of this embodiment tries to flow down the flow path F. The game ball P will flow down along the flow path F in a meandering manner. When the special variable winning ball device 22 (or the variable winning ball device 15) in which such a flow path F is formed is closed, the game ball P has the special winning opening 24 (or the second starting winning opening 14). Basically, the special variable winning ball device 22 (or the variable winning ball device 15) is passed without winning. On the other hand, referring to FIG. 4, when the special variable winning ball device 22 (or the variable winning ball device 15) in which the bottom surface member 23 has moved backward is opened, the game ball P guides the flow path forming base 112. It becomes possible to fall into the flow path portion 115, and it is possible to flow down the guide flow path portion 115 and win the special winning opening 24 (or the second starting winning opening 14).

FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing an example of the circuit configuration of the main board (game control board) 31. Note that FIG. 5 also shows the payout control board 37, the effect control board 80, and the like. On the main board 31, a game control microcomputer (corresponding to game control means) 560 for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program is mounted. The game control microcomputer 560 includes a ROM 54 for storing programs for game control (game progress control), a RAM 55 as a storage unit used as a work memory, a CPU 56 for performing control operations according to the programs, and an I/O port unit 57. including. In this embodiment, the ROM 54 and the RAM 55 are built in the game control microcomputer 560. That is, the game control microcomputer 560 is a one-chip microcomputer. In the one-chip microcomputer, at least the RAM 55 in addition to the CPU 56 may be incorporated, and the ROM 54 may be externally attached or incorporated. The I/O port section 57 may be externally attached.

Since the CPU 56 in the game control microcomputer 560 executes control in accordance with the program stored in the ROM 54, the following description means that the game control microcomputer 560 (or the CPU 56) executes (or performs processing). Specifically, the CPU 56 executes control according to a program. This also applies to the microcomputers mounted on other substrates than the main substrate 31.

Further, the detection signals from the first starting port switch 13a, the second starting port switch 14a, the first count switch 23a, the second count switch 25a, the gate switch 32a, and the normal starting port switch 17a are sent to the game control microcomputer 560. The input driver circuit 58 for giving is also mounted on the main board 31, and has a solenoid 21 for opening and closing the special variable winning ball device 20, a solenoid 106 for opening and closing the special variable winning ball device 22, and a solenoid 206 for opening and closing the variable winning ball device 15. An output circuit 59 that is driven according to a command from the control microcomputer 560 is also mounted on the main board 31, and a system reset circuit (not shown) for resetting the game control microcomputer 560 when the power is turned on and a jackpot game state. An information output circuit (not shown) that outputs an information output signal such as big hit information indicating occurrence to an external device such as a hall computer is also mounted on the main board 31. Note that the main board 31 is also provided with a test signal output circuit (not shown) for outputting a test signal to the outside of the gaming machine.

In this embodiment, the payout control means (composed of a payout control microcomputer (not shown)) mounted on the payout control board 37 is a payout control command (for example, from the game control microcomputer 560). , A prize ball number designating command for designating the number of prize balls is received, and the ball payout device 97 is driven to control the payout of prize balls. Further, to the payout control board 37, for example, a full tank switch 48 that detects that the surplus ball receiving tray (lower pan) 4 is in a full tank state is connected, and the payout control means is operated from the full tank switch 48. When the detection signal is input, a payout control command (full tank detection designation command) indicating that the surplus ball tray (lower plate) 4 is full is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 560.

In this embodiment, the effect control means (composed of effect control microcomputer) mounted on the effect control board 80 sends effect control commands from the game control microcomputer 560 via the relay board 77. The first variable display unit 9a and the second variable display unit 9b which receive and receive the decorative design are displayed, the background design display unit 9c which displays the background design is variably displayed, and the design hold storage display unit 18c.

FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration example of the relay board 77, the effect control board 80, the lamp driver board 35, and the audio output board 70. In the example shown in FIG. 6, the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70 are not equipped with a microcomputer, but may be equipped with a microcomputer. Further, without providing the lamp driver board 35 and the sound output board 70, only the effect control board 80 may be provided for effect control.

The effect control board 80 has an effect control microcomputer 200 including a effect control CPU 201 and a RAM. The RAM may be external. In the effect control board 80, the effect control CPU 201 operates according to a program stored in a built-in or external ROM (not shown), and receives a signal from the main board 31 input via the relay board 77 ( In response to the effect control INT signal), the effect control command is received via the input driver 202 and the input port 203. Further, the effect control CPU 201 causes the VDP (video display processor) 209 to perform display control of the effect display device 9 based on the effect control command.

The effect control command and the effect control INT signal are first input to the input driver 202 in the effect control board 80. The input driver 202 passes the signal input from the relay board 77 only in the direction toward the inside of the effect control board 80 (does not pass the signal in the direction from the inside of the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). It is also a unidirectional circuit as a regulation means.

As a signal direction restricting means, the signal input from the main board 31 is allowed to pass through the relay board 77 only in the direction toward the effect control board 80 (the signal is not passed in the direction from the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). The unidirectional circuit 74 is mounted. As the unidirectional circuit, for example, a diode or a transistor is used. A diode is illustrated in FIG. Further, the unidirectional circuit is provided for each signal. Furthermore, since the production control command and the production control INT signal are output from the main board 31 via the output port 571 which is a unidirectional circuit, the signal from the relay board 77 to the inside of the main board 31 is restricted. That is, the signal from the relay board 77 does not enter the inside of the main board 31 (on the side of the game control microcomputer 560). The output port 571 is a part of the I/O port unit 57 shown in FIG. Further, a signal driver circuit which is a unidirectional circuit may be further provided outside the output port 571 (on the side of the relay board 77).

Further, the effect control CPU 201 outputs a signal for driving the lamp to the lamp driver board 35 via the input/output port 204b. Further, the effect control CPU 201 outputs the sound number data to the sound output board 70 via the input/output port 204a.

Further, the effect control CPU 201 outputs a drive signal to the movable member motor 78a via the input/output port 204c to operate the movable member 78. Further, the effect control CPU 201 inputs a detection signal from the origin position sensor 78b via the input/output port 204c.

In the lamp driver board 35, a signal for driving the lamp is input to the lamp driver 352 via the input/output driver 351. The lamp driver 352 amplifies the signal for driving the lamp and supplies the amplified signal to each of the lamps provided on the frame side such as the top frame lamp 28a, the left frame lamp 28b, and the right frame lamp 28c. Further, it is supplied to the decoration lamp 25 provided on the frame side. Further, in this embodiment, a special winning opening lamp 24a is provided in the special variable winning ball device 22, and the lamp driver 352 amplifies a signal for driving the lamp and supplies the amplified signal to the special winning opening lamp 24a.

In the voice output board 70, the sound number data is input to the voice synthesis IC 703 via the input/output driver 702. The voice synthesizing IC 703 generates a voice or sound effect corresponding to the sound number data and outputs it to the amplifier circuit 705. The amplifier circuit 705 amplifies the output level of the voice synthesizing IC 703 to a level according to the volume set by the volume 706 and outputs the audio signal to the speaker 27. The voice data ROM 704 stores control data according to the tone number data. The control data corresponding to the sound number data is a collection of data indicating the output form of the sound effect or the sound in a predetermined period (for example, the variation period of the decorative pattern) in time series.

In addition, the signal for driving the lamp and the sound number data are bidirectionally communicated between the effect control CPU 201 and the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70 (such as a response signal is transmitted from the signal receiving side to the transmitting side). Communication).

The effect control CPU 201 reads out necessary data from the character ROM (not shown) in accordance with the received effect control command. The character ROM stores in advance character image data that is frequently used among the images displayed on the effect display device 9, specifically, a person, a character, a figure or a symbol (including a decorative pattern and a background pattern). It is for storing. The effect control CPU 201 outputs the data read from the character ROM to the VDP 209. The VDP 209 executes display control based on the data input from the effect control CPU 201.

In this embodiment, the VDP 209 that controls the display of the effect display device 9 is mounted on the effect control board 80. The VDP 209 has an address space independent of the effect control microcomputer 200, and maps the VRAM therein. VRAM is a buffer memory for expanding image data generated by VDP. Then, the VDP 209 outputs the image data in the VRAM to the effect display device 9.

In this embodiment, the production control board 80, the sound output board 70, and the lamp driver board 35 are provided as the boards on which the circuit for controlling the effect device is mounted. It may be mounted on one board. Further, a first effect control board (display control board) on which a circuit for controlling the effect display device 9 is mounted, and a second circuit for controlling other effect devices (a lamp, an LED, a speaker 27, etc.). You may make it provide two boards, such as the production control board. Further, in this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 directly transmits the command to the effect control microcomputer 200, but another board (for example, the voice output board 70 or the lamp shown in FIG. 6). It may be configured to be transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 200 in the effect control board 80 via the driver board 35 or the like). In that case, the command may simply pass through on another board, or control means such as a microcomputer may be mounted on the voice output board 70 or the lamp driver board 35 and the control means may receive the command. The control related to the voice control and the lamp control is executed, and the received command is transmitted as it is or after being changed to, for example, a simplified command, to the effect control microcomputer 200 that controls the effect display device 9. May be. Further, when two boards, a first effect control board and a second effect control board, are provided, a command relating to an effect from the game control microcomputer 560 is transmitted to the second effect control board. The command is sent from the second effect control board to the first effect control board as it is, or after being processed (for example, changing the form or content of the command, simplifying, selecting only the necessary command), and then sent. It may be configured to be performed.

Next, the operation of the gaming machine will be described. FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the game control microcomputer 560 on the main board 31. When the power of the gaming machine is turned on and the input level of the reset terminal to which the reset signal is input becomes high level, the gaming control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) determines whether the content of the program is valid or not. After executing the security check process for confirming whether or not the main process after step S1 is started. In the main process, the CPU 56 first makes necessary initial settings.

In the initial setting process, the CPU 56 first sets the interrupt prohibition (step S1). Next, the interrupt mode is set to the interrupt mode 2 (step S2), and the stack pointer designated address is set to the stack pointer (step S3). Then, initialization of the built-in device (initialization of CTC (counter/timer) and PIO (parallel input/output port) which are built-in devices (built-in peripheral circuits)) is performed (step S4). In the interrupt mode 2, the address synthesized by the value (1 byte) of the specific register (I register) built in the CPU 56 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output by the built-in device is the interrupt address. This is the mode shown.

Next, the CPU 56 confirms the state of the output signal of the clear switch (for example, mounted on the power supply board) input via the input port only once (step S6). If ON is detected in the confirmation, the CPU 56 executes a normal initialization process (steps S10 to S15).

If the clear switch is not on, check whether the backup RAM area data protection process (eg, power supply stop process such as addition of parity data) was performed when power supply to the gaming machine was stopped. Yes (step S7). When it is confirmed that such protection processing is not performed, the CPU 56 executes initialization processing. Whether or not there is backup data in the backup RAM area is confirmed by, for example, the state of the backup flag set in the backup RAM area in the power supply stop process. In this example, if "55H" is set in the backup flag area, it means that there is backup (on state), and if a value other than "55H" is set, it means that there is no backup (off state).

After confirming that there is a backup, the CPU 56 performs a data check (parity check in this example) of the backup RAM area (step S8). In step S8, the calculated checksum is compared with the checksum calculated and stored by the same process in the power supply stop process. When the power is restored after an unexpected power failure such as a power failure, the data in the backup RAM area should have been saved, so the check result (comparison result) becomes normal (match). If the check result is not normal, it means that the data in the backup RAM area is different from the data when the power supply was stopped. In such a case, since the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply was stopped, the initialization process that is executed when the power is turned on, not when the power supply is restored from the stop, is executed.

If the check result is normal, the CPU 56 performs a game state restoration process for returning the internal state of the game control means and the control state of the electric component control means such as the effect control means to the state at the time of stopping the power supply. Specifically, the start address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set to the pointer (step S91), and the contents of the backup setting table are sequentially set to the work area (area in the RAM 55) (step S92). ). The work area is backed up by a backup power supply. Initialized data is set in the backup setting table for the areas that may be initialized in the work area. By the processing of steps S91 and S92, the saved contents of the work area that should not be initialized remain unchanged. The part that should not be initialized is, for example, data indicating the game state before the power supply is stopped (special symbol process flag, etc.), the area where the output state of the output port is saved (output port buffer), unpaid prize balls. For example, a part in which data indicating the number is set.

In addition, the CPU 56 sets the pointer to the start address of the backup command transmission table stored in the ROM 54 (step S93), and according to the contents, the control command (power control command) indicating that the power supply is restored to the effect control board 80. It is controlled so that a restoration command as an initialization command at the time of restoration of supply is transmitted (step S94). Then, the process proceeds to step S15.

In this embodiment, it is checked whether or not the data in the backup RAM area is saved by using both the backup flag and the check data, but only one of them may be used. That is, either the backup flag or the check data may be used as a trigger for executing the state restoration process.

In the initialization process, the CPU 56 first performs a RAM clear process (step S10). Note that the predetermined area (for example, the data of the count value of the counter for generating the big hit determination random number) may be left as it is without initializing the entire area of the RAM 55. The start address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set to the pointer (step S11), and the contents of the initialization setting table are sequentially set to the work area (step S12).

By the processing of steps S11 and S12, for example, the special symbol buffer, the total prize ball number storage buffer, the special symbol process flag, the award ball flag, the out-of-ball flag, the payout stop flag, etc. are selectively processed according to the control state. An initial value is set to the flag for.

Further, the CPU 56 sets the pointer to the start address of the initialization command transmission table stored in the ROM 54 (step S13), and transmits an initialization command for initializing the sub-board to the sub-board according to the contents. The process is executed (step S14). As the initialization command, there is a command or the like indicating the initial symbol displayed on the effect display device 9.

Then, in step S15, the CPU 56 sets the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 560 so that a timer interrupt is periodically performed at predetermined time intervals (for example, 4 ms). That is, a value corresponding to, for example, 4 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register) as an initial value. In this embodiment, it is assumed that a timer interrupt is taken every 4 ms.

When the execution of the initialization process (steps S10 to S15) is completed, the CPU 56 repeatedly executes the display random number updating process (step S17) and the initial value random number updating process (step S18) in the main process. When the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are executed, the interrupt prohibited state is set (step S16), and when the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are completed, the interrupt permitted state is set. It is set (step S19). In this embodiment, the display random number is a random number for determining the variation pattern, and the display random number updating process is a process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the display random number. The initial value random number updating process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. The initial value random number is a random number for determining the initial value of the count value, such as a counter (big hit determination random number generation counter) for generating a random number for determining whether or not to make a big hit. A game control process for controlling the progress of a game to be described later (the game control microcomputer 560 controls, by itself, a game display device, a variable winning ball device, a ball payout device, and other game devices provided in the game machine. In the processing to perform, or the processing of transmitting a command signal to control other microcomputers, also referred to as the game device control processing), the count value of the big hit determination random number generation counter or the like makes one round (the big hit determination random number generation counter, etc. When the number of numerical values between the minimum and maximum values that can be taken is stepped), the initial value is set to the counter.

When the timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 56 executes the timer interrupt process of steps S20 to S35 shown in FIG. In the timer interrupt process, first, a power-off detection process is executed to detect whether a power-off signal has been output (whether or not the power-on signal has been turned on) (step S20). The power-off signal is output, for example, when the voltage drop monitoring circuit mounted on the power supply board detects a drop in the voltage of the power supply supplied to the gaming machine. Then, in the power-off detection process, when the CPU 56 detects that the power-off signal has been output, the CPU 56 executes a power-supply-stop-time process for storing necessary data in the backup RAM area. Then, the detection signals of the first starting port switch 13a, the second starting port switch 14a, the first count switch 23a, the second count switch 25a, the gate switch 32a, and the normal starting port switch 17a are input via the input driver circuit 58. Then, those states are determined (switch process: step S21).

Next, the CPU 56 performs a display control process for controlling the display of the first special symbol display device 8a, the second special symbol display device 8b, the first special symbol reservation storage display device 18a and the second special symbol reservation storage display device 18b. Execute (step S22). Regarding the first special symbol display device 8a and the second special symbol display device 8b, control is performed to output a drive signal to each display device according to the contents of the output buffer set in step S32.

Next, a process for updating the count value of each counter for generating each judgment random number such as a big hit judgment random number used for game control is carried out (judgment random number updating process: step S23). The CPU 56 further performs a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number and the display random number (initial value random number update process, display random number update process: steps S24 and S25).

FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. Each random number is used as follows.
(1) Random 1: Decide whether to generate a big hit or small hit (for big hit judgment)
(2) Random 2: Determines the type of big hit, that is, 2R normal big hit, 2R certainty big hit, 6R regular big hit, 6R certainty big hit, 9R certainty big hit, and 16R certainty big hit (for big hit type determination).
(3) Random 5: Determine the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol (for fluctuation pattern determination)
(4) Random 6: Determine whether to generate a hit based on the normal symbol (for normal symbol hit determination)
(5) Random 7: Determine the initial value of random 1 (for determining the initial value of random 1)
(6) Random 8: Determine the initial value of Random 6 (for determining the random 6 initial value)

In step S23 in the game control process shown in FIG. 8, the game control microcomputer 560 uses (1) a big hit determination random number, (2) a big hit type determination random number, and (4) a normal symbol hit determination. The counter for generating a random number is counted up (1 is added). That is, those are judgment random numbers, and the other random numbers are display random numbers or initial value random numbers. It should be noted that random numbers other than the random numbers (1) to (6) described above are also used in order to enhance the game effect. Further, in the present embodiment, the common random number (random 2) is provided as the random number for determining the type of big hit and the random number for determining the type of small hit, but different random numbers are provided. May be.

Further, the CPU 56 performs a first special symbol process process (step S26A). In the first special symbol process process, the corresponding process is executed according to the first special symbol process flag for controlling the first special symbol display 8a and the special variable winning ball device 20 in a predetermined order according to the game state. The CPU 56 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag during each process according to the gaming state. Next, the CPU 56 performs a second special symbol process process (step S26B). In the second special symbol process processing, according to the second special symbol process flag for controlling the second special symbol display device 8b, the special variable winning ball device 20, the special variable winning ball device 22 in a predetermined order according to the game state. Perform the corresponding process. The CPU 56 updates the value of the second special symbol process flag during each process according to the gaming state. Then, the CPU 56 performs a normal symbol process process (step S26C). In the normal symbol process process, the corresponding process is executed according to the normal symbol process flag for controlling the normal symbol display 10 and the variable winning ball device 15 in a predetermined order according to the game state. The CPU 56 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag during each process according to the gaming state.

Next, the CPU 56 performs a pending storage process (step S27). In the pending storage process, the CPU 56 executes a process of calculating and managing the total number (total pending storage number) that is the sum of the first pending storage number and the second pending storage number.

Next, the CPU 56 performs a process of transmitting an effect control command related to display control of the first variable display unit 9a and the second variable display unit 9b and an effect control command related to the number of held memories (effect control command control process: step S28).

Further, the CPU 56 performs an information output process for outputting data such as big hit information, start information, and probability variation information supplied to the hall management computer (step S29).

Further, the CPU 56 executes prize ball processing such as setting the number of prize balls based on the detection signals of the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, the first count switch 23a, and the second count switch 25a. (Step S30). Specifically, in accordance with the winning detection based on that any of the first starting port switch 13a, the second starting port switch 14a, the first count switch 23a, and the second count switch 25a is turned on, the payout control board 37 The payout control command indicating the number of prize balls is output to the payout control microcomputer mounted on the. The payout control microcomputer drives the ball payout device 97 in response to a payout control command indicating the number of prize balls.

In this embodiment, the RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided. However, the CPU 56 outputs the contents regarding the ON/OFF of the solenoid in the RAM area of the output port to the output port. Output (step S31: output process).

Further, the CPU 56 sets the first special symbol display control data for performing the effect display of the first special symbol in the output buffer for setting the first special symbol display control data according to the value of the first special symbol process flag. Along with, the special symbol display which sets the second special symbol display control data for performing the effect display of the second special symbol in the output buffer for setting the second special symbol display control data according to the value of the second special symbol process flag Control processing is performed (step S32). For example, if the fluctuation speed is 1 frame/0.2 seconds, the CPU 56 increments the value of the display control data set in the output buffer by 1 every 0.2 seconds. Further, the CPU 56 outputs a drive signal in step S22 in accordance with the display control data set in the output buffer, so that the variable display of the special symbols in the first special symbol display device 8a and the second special symbol display device 8b is performed. To execute.

Further, the CPU 56 performs a normal symbol display control process for setting the normal symbol display control data for performing the normal symbol effect display according to the value of the normal symbol process flag in the output buffer for the normal symbol display control data setting ( Step S33). For example, if the fluctuation speed is 1 frame/0.2 seconds, the CPU 56 increments the value of the display control data set in the output buffer by 1 every 0.2 seconds. Further, the CPU 56 outputs the drive signal in step S22 in accordance with the display control data set in the output buffer, thereby performing the variable display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display device 10.

Further, the CPU 56 performs an error notification process for performing control related to error notification (step S34). In step S34, for example, when the CPU 56 receives the full tank detection designation command from the payout control means mounted on the payout control board 37, the full effect error notification is displayed on the effect display device 9, so that the effect is produced. Control is performed to transmit a full error notification designating command to the control microcomputer 200. Further, after the display of the full tank error notification is started, when the full tank detection designation command is not received from the payout control means (when the full tank state of the surplus ball receiving tray (lower plate) 4 is canceled) , CPU56 performs control for transmitting a full error canceling command to the effect control microcomputer 200. After that, the interrupt permission state is set (step S35), and the process ends.

According to the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is activated every 4 ms. The game control process corresponds to the process of steps S21 to S33 (excluding step S29) in the timer interrupt process. Further, in this embodiment, the game control process is executed in the timer interrupt process, but in the timer interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred is set, and the game control process is the main process. May be executed in.

In this embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is executed by the two display devices of the first special symbol display device 8a and the second special symbol display device 8b, but the CPU 56 is The two displays are controlled so that no big hits occur at the same time.

FIG. 10A is an explanatory diagram showing a big hit determination table. The big hit determination table is a set of data stored in the ROM 54, and is a table in which a big hit determination value to be compared with random 1 is set. The big hit judgment table includes a non-probable-variable-time big hit judgment table used in a low-probability state (low probability/non-KT state, low probability/first KT state) and a definite change state (high-probability state (high probability/first KT state, high probability state). Probability/second KT state)), which is a probability variation big hit judgment table. The numerical values described in the left column of FIG. 10(A) are set in the non-probability-variable jackpot determination table, and the numerical values described in the right column of FIG. 10(A) are set in the probability-variable jackpot determination table. Numerical value is set. The numerical value described in FIG. 10(A) is a jackpot determination value.

FIG. 10B is an explanatory diagram showing a small hit determination table. The small hit determination table is a set of data stored in the ROM 54, and is a table in which a small hit determination value to be compared with the random R is set. The numerical values described in FIG. 10B are set in the small hit determination table. The numerical value shown in FIG. 10(B) is a small hit determination value.

In this embodiment, as will be described later, the small hit determination process (see step S162B) may be performed only when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed, and the small hit may occur, and the KT state Since the right-handed operation is performed, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed more frequently. Therefore, in this embodiment, in the KT state, the frequency of control to the small hitting game state is higher than that of the large hitting game state.

The CPU 56 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 503 at a predetermined time and sets the extracted value as the value of the big hit judging random number (random 1). The big hit judging random number value is shown in FIG. If any of the jackpot determination values match, it is determined to be a jackpot for special symbols. When the big hit determination random number value matches any of the small hit determination values shown in FIG. 10(B), it is determined to make a small hit for the special symbol. The “probability” shown in FIG. 10(A) indicates the probability (ratio) of a big hit. The "probability" shown in FIG. 10(B) indicates the probability (ratio) of a small hit. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10(B), the probability (ratio) of small hits is set to 122/320, which is set to about 1/3. There is. Also, to determine whether to make a big hit, it is to make a decision to move to the big hit gaming state, the stop symbol in the first special symbol display device 8a or the second special symbol display device 8b It also means deciding whether or not to make a jackpot design. Also, determining whether to make a small hit, is to determine whether to shift to the small hit game state, whether the stop symbol in the second special symbol display 8b to be a small hit symbol It also means deciding whether or not.

In addition, in this embodiment, when it is decided not to make a big hit when executing the variable display of the first special symbol, all are unconditionally missed. Further, when it is determined not to be a big hit when performing the variable display of the second special symbol, the lottery process using the small hit determination table shown in FIG. It is decided to make a small hit with probability (however, as will be described later, it may be out of force).

FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing the jackpot type determination tables 131a and 131b stored in the ROM 54. The jackpot type determination tables 131a and 131b, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot pattern, the jackpot type is "2R normal jackpot" based on the random number (random 2) for jackpot type determination, It is a table referred to in order to determine any one of "2R probability variation big hit", "6R probability variation big hit", "6R probability variation big hit", "9R probability variation big hit", or "16R probability variation big hit".

As shown in FIG. 11(A), in this embodiment, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, it is determined to be "16R probability variation big hit" with a probability of 9%, and "56R with a probability of 56%". 6R probability variable big hit" is determined, and there is a 35% probability that "6R normal big hit" is determined. Further, as shown in FIG. 11(B), in this embodiment, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, it is determined as "16R probability variation big hit" with a probability of 10%, and a probability of 50%. "9R probability variation big hit" is decided, 5% probability is determined as "2R probability variation big hit", and 35% probability is determined as "2R normal variation big hit".

The "16R probability variable jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a jackpot gaming state for 16 rounds and is shifted to a high-probability state after the jackpot gaming state is finished. Further, the "9R probability variation big hit" is a big hit that is controlled to a big hit game state of 9 rounds and is shifted to a high probability state after the end of the big hit game state. Further, the "6R probability variation big hit" is a big hit which is controlled to a big hit game state of 6 rounds and is shifted to a high probability state after the end of the big hit game state. Further, the "2R probability variation big hit" is a big hit which is controlled to a big hit game state of two rounds and is shifted to a high probability state after the end of the big hit game state.

The "6R normal big hit" is a big hit that is controlled to a big hit game state of 6 rounds and is shifted to a low probability state after the end of the big hit game state. Further, the "2R normal big hit" is a big hit that is controlled to a big hit game state for two rounds and is controlled to have a low probability state after the big hit game state is finished.

In this embodiment, in the case of "16R certainty variation big hit", "9R certainty variation big hit", "6R certainty variation big hit", and "6R regular big hit", a predetermined period (in this example, in each round of the big hit game) The special winning opening is controlled to be open until 30 seconds have elapsed or a predetermined number (10 in this example) of game balls are won, and it is possible to win a maximum of 10 special winning openings in each round. Is. On the other hand, in the case of "2R probability variation big hit" and "2R normal big hit", the special winning opening is controlled to be in an open state only for a short period (1.8 seconds in this example) in each round of the big hit game. The number of prizes that can be won in each round is about two to three.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the big hit game is finished, it is controlled to any of the first KT state, the second KT state or the non-KT state according to the game state before the big hit game and the big hit type. How to transition the game state after the big hit game will be described later (see FIG. 33).

12 to 14 are explanatory diagrams showing a variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol and the decorative symbol used in this embodiment. The EXT shown in FIGS. 12 to 14 is the second byte data of the effect control command (2-byte configuration) corresponding to each variation pattern.

In the example shown in FIGS. 12 to 14, seven types of first variation patterns #01 to #07 for the first special symbol and the first decorative symbol, and a second variation pattern for the second special symbol and the second decorative symbol. 32 types of #01 to #32 are used. Hereinafter, for example, the variation pattern #n (n=01 to 07 or 01 to 32) means both the first variation pattern #n and the second variation pattern #n.

When performing the variable display of the first special symbol, in the non-KT state (low probability/non-KT state), the variation pattern table for the first special symbol for non-KT time shown in FIG. 12(A) The variation pattern is selected and determined. As shown in FIG. 12(A), when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed in the non-KT state, it is determined to be one of the first variation patterns #01 to #05.

When the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, in the KT state (low probability/first KT state, high probability/first KT state, high probability/second KT state), the KT shown in FIG. 12(B) The variation pattern table for the first special symbol for time is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 12(B), when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed in the KT state, it is determined to be one of the first variation patterns #06 to #07.

When performing the variable display of the second special symbol, in the non-KT state (low probability/non-KT state), the variation pattern table for the second special symbol for non-KT time shown in FIG. 13(C) The variation pattern is selected and determined. As shown in FIG. 13C, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the non-KT state, it is determined to be one of the second variation patterns #01 to #03. Specifically, when it is determined to be out, the second variation pattern #01 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for a long period of 15 minutes. Also, when it is determined that the small hit, the second variation pattern #02 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for a long period of 15 minutes. Further, when it is determined to be a big hit, the second variation pattern #03 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for a certain long period of 5 minutes.

In this embodiment, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed and a small hit occurs even in the non-KT state, it is possible to expect a certain amount of prize balls by winning the game balls into the special winning opening 24. Will occur. Therefore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 13C, even if the variable display of the second special symbol is executed during the non-KT state, the variable time is extremely lengthened and the frequency of execution of the variable display is reduced. By doing so, the frequency of small hits is reduced, and it is possible to prevent a situation in which a small hit is aimed at even if the player is in the non-KT state. In this embodiment, the “frequent occurrence frequency of small hits” is, for example, the occurrence rate of small hits per unit time (for example, 1 minute), and in the KT state, for example, small hits per unit time. Is higher than in the normal state.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 13(C), when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed during the non-KT state, the variation time is 5 even when the big hit is made. By making the length relatively long, it is possible to prevent the act of unreasonably aiming at the prize ball due to winning in the special winning opening 24 during the non-KT state. However, in the case of a big hit, it is not necessary to take a long time to digest the first reserved memory as compared with the case of a small hit, so that the variation time is shorter than that in the case of a small hit. There is.

When executing the variable display of the second special symbol, in the case of low probability/first KT state, the big hit game based on 6R normal big hit or 2R normal big hit that triggered the low probability/first KT state is ended. A variation pattern table is selected according to the number of variations since then. In this case, if the variation display of the first variation is executed, the variation pattern with the low probability/first KT shown in FIG. 13D and the second special symbol variation pattern table for the first variation is selected. It is determined. As shown in FIG. 13D, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed as the first variation of the low probability/first KT state, it is determined to be one of the second variation patterns #04 to #06. To be done.

Note that, as shown in FIG. 13D, when it is determined that the first change of the low probability/first KT state is the deviation, the second change pattern #04 of the short change with the change time of 5 seconds is determined. It Further, when it is determined that a small hit is the first change in the low probability/first KT state, the second change pattern #05 (the second start winning opening is opened) is a relatively long change time of 7 seconds for the small hit. (Variation pattern for preparation). In this embodiment, as described above, in the case where the first KT state is controlled, although the frequency of small hits is high, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 is lengthened to actually cause the special variable winning. The special winning opening 24 in the ball device 22 is set so as to rarely win a prize. However, in a state immediately after the transition to the low probability/first KT state, there is a possibility that some game balls are accumulated on the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 15 or the special variable winning ball device 22, and the special variable winning ball is immediately. If the device 22 is controlled to be in the open state, a considerable number of game balls may enter the special winning opening 24. Therefore, in this embodiment, in the first variation of the first KT state, by securing a variation time of at least 7 seconds, the variable winning ball device 15 and the special variable winning ball device 22 before the transition to the first KT state. By controlling the special variable winning ball device 22 to the open state after allowing a sufficient time for all the game balls accumulated on the bottom member to fall, it is possible to win the special winning opening 24. This prevents a situation in which a prize ball more than expected is obtained in the first KT state. Further, when it is determined that the big hit as the first variation of the low probability / first KT state, the second variation pattern #06 is determined, the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for 2 minutes.

In the case of executing the variable display of 2 to 49 fluctuations after finishing the big hit game based on the 6R normal big hit or the 2R normal big hit which triggered the low probability/first KT state, FIG. 13(E) The low probability/first KT time and the second special symbol fluctuation pattern table for the 2nd to 49th fluctuations are selected to determine the fluctuation pattern. As shown in FIG. 13(E), when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed as the 2-49th variation of the low probability/first KT state, one of the second variation patterns #07 to #13 Is decided. Further, as shown in FIG. 13E, when it is determined that the low probability/the second KT state of the first KT state is the second to 49th variation, the second variation pattern #07 of the shortened variation having a short variation time of 5 seconds or In some cases, the second fluctuation pattern #08 having a shortened fluctuation whose fluctuation time is as short as 1 second may be determined. On the other hand, when it is determined that the low probability/the 1st KT state is the 2nd to 49th fluctuations and the deviation, the second fluctuation pattern #09 with reach may be determined. Further, when it is determined that the small hit is the second to 49th fluctuations of the low probability/first KT state, the fluctuation time is as short as 5 seconds and the second fluctuation pattern #10 of the shortened fluctuation or the fluctuation time is as short as 1 second. The second fluctuation pattern #11 of the shortened fluctuation may be determined. On the other hand, when the small hit is determined as the 2-49th variation of the low probability/first KT state, the second variation pattern #12 with reach may be determined. The second fluctuation patterns #07 and #10 are fluctuation patterns that can be selected only when the second reserved memory is not stored, and the second fluctuation patterns #08 and #11 are stored when one or more second reserved memories are stored. This is a fluctuation pattern that can be selected only when As a result, the storage capacity is quickly consumed and the operating rate is increased. Further, when it is determined that the big hit is the 2-49th variation of the low probability/first KT state, the second variation pattern #13 with reach is determined.

In addition, after the big hit game based on the 6R normal big hit or the 2R normal big hit that triggered the low probability/first KT state, the 50th change display (that is, the low probability/final change in the first KT state) is executed. If so, the second special symbol variation pattern table for the low probability/first KT and the 50th variation shown in FIG. 13(F) is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 13(F), when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed as the 50th variation of the low probability/first KT state, the second variation pattern #14 to #16 is determined. To be done.

In this embodiment, when the low probability/first KT state is controlled, for example, a character display such as “during chance time” is displayed on the effect display device 9. As shown in FIG. 13(F), when it is determined that the 50th variation of the low probability/first KT state is a deviation or a small hit, a character display such as “end of chance time!” is displayed on the effect display device 9. The second variation pattern #14 or the second variation pattern #15 accompanied by the end display is determined. In addition, as shown in FIG. 13(F), when it is determined that the 50th variation of the low probability/first KT state is a big hit, the effect display device 9 displays characters such as "end of chance time!!" After the display, the second variation pattern #16 accompanied by a predetermined revival display is determined.

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 12, when a big hit occurs in the variation display of the first special symbol during the KT state, the first variation pattern #07 having a variation time of 10 seconds is determined. Is configured. This is a case where a big hit occurs immediately in the change display of the first special symbol immediately after the transition to the second KT state, and if the change time of the big hit change of the first special symbol is set to a long change time, Since the variation of the second special symbol executed during the big hit variation of the first special symbol is a forced outfall, the forced outfall frequently occurs and the player is a small hit even in the second KT state. You will not be able to receive any profit from. Therefore, in this embodiment, by changing the variation time of the big hit variation of the first special symbol to a short variation time, the big hit game state based on the variation of the first special symbol is generated before the frequent occurrence of forced disengagement. It is configured.

Note that, unlike the present embodiment, even when the variation of the second special symbol is started during the big hit variation of the first special symbol, the configuration of the variation of the second special symbol is not forced to fall off (for example, the first Special symbol big hit symbol When the second special symbol is changing at the time of stop, if it is a gaming machine of the second special symbol forced disengagement), the variation time of the first special symbol big hit in the KT state May be a long fluctuation time (for example, 1 minute). This is a case where a big hit occurs immediately in the change display of the first special symbol immediately after the transition to the second KT state, and if the change time of the big hit is the same short change time as the deviation, the player You will not be able to receive any profit from the small hit. Therefore, if the variation time of the big hit of the first special symbol in the KT state is a long variation time (for example, 1 minute), even in such a case, a sufficient time that at least a plurality of small hits can occur. (For example, 1 minute) is ensured.

When executing the variable display of the second special symbol, if it is in the high probability/first KT state, the jackpot game based on the 6R certainty variation jackpot or the 9R certainty variation jackpot that triggered the high probability/first KT state is finished. A variation pattern table is selected according to the number of variations since then. In this case, if the variation display of the first variation is executed, the high probability/first KT shown in FIG. 14G and the second special symbol variation pattern table for the first variation are selected, and the variation pattern is It is determined. As shown in FIG. 14(G), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the first variation of the high probability/first KT state, the second variation pattern #17 to #21 is determined. To be done.

Note that, as in the case of the first change in the low probability/first KT state, as shown in FIG. 14G, the change time is 5 seconds even when the deviation is determined as the first change in the high probability/first KT state. May be determined as the second variation pattern #17 of short shortening variation. On the other hand, even when it is determined that the first variation of the high probability/first KT state is the deviation, the second variation pattern #18 with reach may be determined. Also, when the small hit is determined as the first variation of the high probability/first KT state, the variation pattern for the second starting winning opening opening preparation (second variation pattern #19) may be determined. On the other hand, when the small hit is determined as the first variation of the high probability/first KT state, the second variation pattern #20 with reach may be determined. In addition, as shown in FIG. 14G, when it is determined that the big change is the first change of the high probability/first KT state, the second change pattern #21 with reach is determined.

In addition, in the case of executing the variation display after the second variation after the jackpot game based on the 6R certainty variation jackpot and the 9R certainty variation jackpot that triggered the high probability/first KT state, in the case of executing the variation display after the second variation, FIG. 14(H) The high probability/first KT and the second special symbol variation pattern table for the second variation and thereafter are selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 14(H), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the second variation of the high probability/first KT state and thereafter, in any of the second variation patterns #22 to #28. It is determined.

Note that, as in the case of the low probability/the 2nd to 49th fluctuations of the first KT state, as shown in FIG. May be determined to be the second fluctuation pattern #22 with a shortened fluctuation of 5 seconds or the second fluctuation pattern #23 with a shortened fluctuation of 1 second, which is even shorter. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is a deviation after the second variation of the high probability/first KT state, the second variation pattern #24 with reach may be determined. In addition, when it is determined that the small hit is the second variation after the high probability/first KT state, the variation time is shortened to 5 seconds and the second variation pattern #25 of variation, or the variation time is shortened to 1 second. The second fluctuation pattern #26 of fluctuation may be determined. On the other hand, when it is determined as the small hit after the second variation of the high probability/first KT state, the second variation pattern #27 with reach may be determined. The second fluctuation patterns #22 and #25 are fluctuation patterns that can be selected only when the second reserved memory is not stored, and the second fluctuation patterns #23 and #26 are stored when one or more second reserved memories are stored. This is a fluctuation pattern that can be selected only when As a result, the storage capacity is quickly consumed and the operating rate is increased. In addition, when it is determined that the big hit is the second variation after the high probability/first KT state, the second variation pattern #28 with reach is determined.

When performing the variable display of the second special symbol, in the case of high probability / second KT state, the high probability / second KT variation pattern table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 14(I) is selected. The fluctuation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 14(I), when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the high probability/second KT state, it is determined to be one of the second variation patterns #29 to #32.

As shown in FIG. 14(I), when it is determined that there is a deviation in the high probability/second KT state, when the variation time is determined to be the second variation pattern #25 with a shortened variation of 1.5 seconds. There is. On the other hand, when the high probability/second KT state is determined to be a deviation, the second variation pattern #30 with reach may be determined. In addition, when it is determined that the small hit in the high probability/second KT state, the second variation pattern #31 of the short variation with the variation time as short as 1.5 seconds is determined. Further, when it is determined that the big hit in the high probability/second KT state, the second variation pattern #32 with reach is determined.

In the example shown in FIG. 13 and FIG. 14, the shortened fluctuation of 5 seconds or 1 second is executed in the first KT state, and the shortened fluctuation of 1.5 seconds is executed in the second KT state. Although the case is shown, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, a shortened fluctuation of 5 seconds or 1 second may be executed in the low probability state, and a shortened fluctuation of 1.5 seconds may be executed in the high probability state.

Next, the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 15 and the special variable winning ball device 22 in the KT state will be described. FIG. 15 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an opening pattern of the variable winning ball device 15 and the special variable winning ball device 22 in the KT state. Of these, FIG. 15(1) shows an opening pattern of the variable winning ball device 15 and the special variable winning ball device 22 in the first KT state, and FIG. 15(2) shows the variable winning ball device 15 and the special winning ball device 15 in the second KT state. The opening pattern of the variable winning ball device 22 is shown.

First, the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 15 and the special variable winning ball device 22 in the first KT state will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 15(1), when the game ball passes through the gate 32 and the game ball is detected by the gate switch 32a, or the game ball enters the normal start winning opening 17 and the normal starting winning opening 17a. When the game sphere is detected in, the normal symbol display 10 executes the variable display of the normal symbol, and when it is determined that the normal symbol hits, the normal symbol display 10 displays the hit symbol as a derivation display, and it is lost. When it is determined, the deviation symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display device 10. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 15(1), the variation time of the normal symbol is 0.2 seconds, and the symbol confirmation time for deriving and displaying the hit symbol or the deviating symbol is 0.2 seconds. .. When the winning symbol is derived and displayed, as shown in FIG. 15(1), after the symbol confirmation time of 0.2 seconds has elapsed, the second start winning opening opening pre-processing time of 0.1 seconds has elapsed. After that, the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for 5.5 seconds, and the game ball can be won in the second starting winning port 14.

When the game ball is won in the second start winning port 14 while the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, and when it is determined to be a small hit, , The small winning symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 8b. When the small hit symbol is derived and displayed, as shown in FIG. 15(1), the special variable winning ball device 22 is opened for 0.8 seconds, and the game ball can be won in the special winning opening 24. Becomes However, in the first KT state, as shown in FIG. 15A, the opening time of the special variable winning ball device 22 on the downstream side is as short as 0.8 seconds, whereas that of the variable winning ball device 15 on the upstream side. The opening time is as long as 5.5 seconds. Therefore, in the first KT state, although a small hit is likely to occur, it is extremely rare that a game ball will be won in the special winning opening 24 (for example, about 1 ball for every 100 variable displays).

In the first KT state, as shown in FIG. 15(1), after the opening of the variable winning ball device 15 is finished, the opening of the next variable winning ball device 15 can be performed is the fluctuation time of the next ordinary symbol. It is after a lapse of at least 0.5 seconds which is a total of 0.2 seconds, the symbol fixing time 0.2 seconds and the second starting winning opening opening pre-processing time 0.1 seconds. Therefore, in this embodiment, in the first KT state, a closing period of at least 0.5 seconds is provided as the interval period after the variable winning ball device 15 is opened.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the first KT state, the variable winning ball device 15 is normally controlled to be in the open state after the game ball passes through the gate 32 in a state where the symbols are not normally changed. Along with 0.5 seconds after totaling the variable time 0.2 seconds of the symbol, the symbol finalization time 0.2 seconds and the second start winning opening opening pretreatment time 0.1 seconds, the game ball is gated. It takes about 0.6 seconds to pass the variable winning ball device 15 after passing through 32. In this way, in the first KT state, the time from when the game ball passes through the gate 32 until the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to be in an open state is normal, in a state where the symbols are not normally changed. It is shorter than the time it takes for the game ball to reach the variable winning ball device 15 after the game ball passes through the gate 32 in the state where the symbols are not changed, so the variable winning ball device 15 is already in the open state. The game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 15 while being controlled. Therefore, in the first KT state, the game balls that have passed through the gate 32 in a state where the normal symbols are not changed are easy to win in the variable winning ball device 15.

Next, the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 15 and the special variable winning ball device 22 in the second KT state will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 15(2), when the game ball passes through the gate 32 and the game ball is detected by the gate switch 32a, or the game ball enters the normal start winning opening 17 and the normal starting winning opening 17a. When the game sphere is detected in, the normal symbol display 10 executes the variable display of the normal symbol, and when it is determined that the normal symbol hits, the normal symbol display 10 displays the hit symbol as a derivation display, and it is lost. When determined, the normal symbol display 10 deviates and displays the misaligned symbol. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 15(2), the variation time of the normal symbol is 1.0 second, and the symbol confirmation time for deriving and displaying the winning symbol or the deviating symbol is 0.2 second. .. When the winning symbol is derived and displayed, as shown in FIG. 15(2), after the symbol fixing time of 0.2 seconds has elapsed, the second starting winning opening opening pre-processing time of 2.6 seconds has elapsed. After that, the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for 0.2 seconds, and the game ball can be won in the second starting winning port 14.

When the game ball is won in the second start winning port 14 while the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, and when it is determined to be a small hit, , The small winning symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 8b. Then, when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed, as shown in FIG. 15(2), the special variable winning ball device 22 is opened for 0.8 seconds, and the game ball can be won in the special winning opening 24. Becomes

In the second KT state, unlike the first KT state, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 is as short as 0.2 seconds. In addition, in this embodiment, in the second KT state, at least 3.8 seconds as an interval period (closing period) after the variable winning ball device 15 is opened (normal symbol variation time of 1.0 seconds + symbol determination time of 0). A relatively long period of 2 seconds + the time before the second starting winning opening opening process is 2.6 seconds) is secured. Therefore, in the second KT state, as shown in FIG. 15(2), since the open time of the upstream variable winning ball device 15 is short and the interval period (closed period) is long, the downstream side compared to the first KT state. It is easy for the game ball to enter the special variable winning ball device 22 and it is easy for the game ball to enter the special winning opening 24.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the second KT state, the variable winning ball device 15 is normally controlled to be in the open state after the game ball passes through the gate 32 in a state where the symbols are not normally changed. Along with the total variation time of 1.0 seconds, the symbol determination time of 0.2 seconds, and the second starting winning opening opening preprocessing time of 2.6 seconds, which is 3.8 seconds, the game ball is gated. It takes about 0.6 seconds to pass the variable winning ball device 15 after passing 32. In this way, in the second KT state, the time from when the game ball passes through the gate 32 to when the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to be in an open state is normally more than normal when the symbols are not changed. It is longer than the time it takes for the game ball to reach the variable winning ball device 15 after the game ball passes through the gate 32 in the state where the symbols are not changed, so the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to the open state. Before being played, the game ball will reach the variable winning ball device 15. Therefore, in the second KT state, the game balls that have passed through the gate 32 in a state where the normal symbols are not changed are difficult to win in the variable winning ball device 15.

In this embodiment, the process of executing the variable display of the normal symbols and controlling the opening of the variable winning ball device 15 is a normal symbol process process by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56). This is performed by executing (see step S26C). Further, the game control microcomputer 560, in the normal symbol process process of step S26C, whether the game state is a probability change state (high probability state), whether in the non-KT state, the first KT state or the second KT state. Regardless of whether there is a big hit game state or not, it is determined with the same probability (for example, 10% or 100%) whether or not to be a normal figure hit.

In this embodiment, in the first KT state and the second KT state, the variation time of the normal symbol and the symbol settlement time are the same at 0.2 seconds each, and the second start winning opening opening pre-processing time is the second. A case has been shown in which the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is made different by shortening it to 0.1 seconds in the 1KT state and lengthening it to 2.6 seconds in the second KT state. I can't. For example, the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning a prize ball device 15 may be made different by making the variation time and the symbol determination time different between the first KT state and the second KT state. Further, for example, the second start winning opening opening processing time after closing the variable winning ball device 15 is configured to be controllable, and if the second starting winning opening opening processing time is different between the first KT state and the second KT state. The variable winning a prize ball device 15 may be configured to have a different closing period (interval period). In particular, if the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball device 15 in the first KT state is shortened by any of the above methods, the winning of the special winning opening 24 in the first KT state can be suppressed. it can.

In this embodiment, as will be described later, in the first KT state, the high base state is controlled by setting the high base flag indicating the high base state, as shown in FIG. 15(1). The variable winning ball device 15 is controlled so as to have a long opening time. Further, in the second KT state, by controlling the low base state without setting the high base flag, as shown in FIG. 15(2), control is performed so that the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 is shortened. ..

Note that, for example, a special flag (open extension flag) indicating that the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 is extended is provided, and if the special flag is set, the variable winning as shown in FIG. The ball device 15 is controlled by a first opening pattern (long opening) that opens for a long time, and if the special flag is not set, a second opening pattern that opens the variable winning ball device 15 for a short time shown in FIG. You may comprise so that it may control by short circuit opening. That is, the special flag may be set only in the first KT state, and in other states including the big hit game state, the special flag may not be set.

Even in the first KT state, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 may be shortened when the low probability/last variation display in the first KT state is executed. For example, in the low-probability/first KT state 50 times of the shortened variation period of the special symbol, the special flag may be deleted in accordance with the 49th variation stop of the special symbol. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the long open of the variable winning ball device 15 when performing the left hit notification after the low probability/first KT state ends. be able to.

As described above, in the case of configuring the variable winning ball device 15 using the opening control flag (special flag) of the variable winning ball device 15, further, a flag for shortening fluctuation of the variable display of the special symbol is used. The variable display of the special symbol may be controlled in this case, and in this case, the special flag and the flag for the shortened variation may be separately managed.

Further, the variable winning ball device 15 may be short-circuited during the low probability/non-KT state. With such a configuration, when the probability of opening the variable winning ball device 15 is increased in the low-probability/non-KT state (left-handed state), only a few game balls are shot and operated. Thus, it is possible to prevent the variable winning ball device 15 from winning, and it is possible to prevent the right-handed operation from being performed during the low probability/non-KT state.

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 15, the variation time of the normal symbol is set to a short time of 0.2 seconds. This is, for example, in the case where the variable display of the second special symbol having a relatively long variation time is executed in the first KT state, the variable winning ball is in a state in which the normal symbol is in a variation stop and the normal symbol is not stored. This is because the device 15 is in the closed state, and it is possible to capture the target of the variation stop timing of the second special symbol (in the case of a small hit, if the variation time of the normal symbol is long, the gate 32). The variable winning ball device 15 does not open until the game ball that has passed through reaches the variable winning ball device 15 or the special variable winning ball device 22, and the special winning opening 24 can be won. On the other hand, in this embodiment, the variable winning ball device 15 can be opened before the variable winning ball device 15 reaches the variable winning ball device 15 after the game ball passes through the gate 32 by shortening the variation time of the normal symbol. Since it is set to be started, it is possible to eliminate the capture element by the firing operation aiming at the small hit occurrence timing based on the variable display of the second special symbol in the first KT state.

16 and 17 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the contents of the effect control command sent to the effect control microcomputer 200. In the example shown in FIG. 16, commands 8000(H) to 8007(H), 8011(H) to 8030(H) are the first variable display portion 9a or the second variable display portion corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol. 9b is a production control command (variation pattern command) for designating a variation pattern of a decorative pattern variably displayed in 9b. The effect control command for designating the variation pattern is also a command for designating the variation start. Therefore, when the effect control microcomputer 200 receives any of the commands 8000(H) to 8007(H) and 8011(H) to 8030(H), the first variable display unit 9a or the second variable display unit 9b. At, control is performed so as to start variable display of the decorative pattern.

The command 9001 (H) is a production control command (display result 1 designation command) (deletion designation command) that designates that the display result of the variable display of the decorative design designated by the variation pattern command is to be dislocated. Command 9002 (H) is a production control command (display result 2 designation command (16R probability variation big hit designation command)) that designates that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern designated by the variation pattern command is 16R probability variation big hit. .. Command 9003 (H) is a production control command (display result 3 designation command (9R probability variation big hit designation command)) that designates that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern designated by the variation pattern command is 9R probability variation big hit. .. Command 9004 (H) is an effect control command (display result 4 designation command (6R probability variation big hit designation command)) that designates that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern designated by the variation pattern command is 6R probability variation big hit. .. The command 9005 (H) is a production control command (display result 5 designation command (6R normal jackpot designation command)) that designates that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern designated by the variation pattern command is the 6R normal jackpot. .. Command 9006 (H) is a production control command (display result 6 designation command (2R probability variation big hit designation command)) that designates that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern designated by the variation pattern command is 2R probability variation big hit. .. Command 9007 (H) is a production control command (display result 7 designation command (2R normal jackpot designation command)) that designates that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern designated by the variation pattern command is 2R normal jackpot. .. The command 9008 (H) is an effect control command (display result 8 designation command (small hit designation command)) that designates that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern designated by the variation pattern command is a small hit.

Hereinafter, the display result 1 designation command to the display result 8 designation command may be referred to as a display result designation command. In this embodiment, since the game control microcomputer 560 transmits the display result designation command immediately before the variation pattern command, the effect control microcomputer 200 receives the display result designation immediately before the first variation pattern command. The command can be determined to be the display result designation command for the first decorative pattern, and the display result designation command received immediately before the second variation pattern command can be determined to be the display result designation command for the second decorative pattern. The display result designating command can be used for both the first decorative design and the second decorative design, but the display result designating command for the first decorative design and the display result designating command for the second decorative design may be different.

Further, the game control microcomputer 560 does not send the display result designation command, but each of 15R probability variation big hit/9R probability variation big hit/6R probability variation big hit/6R regular big hit/2R probability variation big hit/2R normal big hit/small hit/out The variation pattern command may be determined in accordance with the above, and the effect control microcomputer 200 may determine the stop symbol of the decorative symbol based on the received variation pattern command.

The command A000 (H) is a production control command (first symbol fixing designation command (first decorative symbol stop designation command)) for instructing to stop the variable display of the first decorative symbol. The command A001 (H) is a production control command (second symbol fixing designation command (second decorative symbol stop designation command)) for instructing to stop the variable display of the second decorative symbol.

Command BXXX (H) (X = arbitrary hexadecimal number) is a production control command sent from the big hit game start to the big hit game end. Among them, B000 (H) is an effect control command (first jackpot start designation command: first fanfare designating command) that designates the start of the first jackpot game. B001 (H) is a production control command (first jackpot end designation command: first ending designation command) that designates the end of the first jackpot game. B002 (H) is a production control command (second jackpot start designation command: second fanfare design command) that designates the start of the second jackpot game. B003 (H) is an effect control command (second jackpot end designation command: second ending designation command) that designates the end of the second jackpot game. B004 (H) is an effect control command (small hit start designation command) for designating the start of the small hit game. B005 (H) is an effect control command (small hit end designation command) for designating the end of the small hit game.

Command B1XX (H) is a production control command (display command during big winning opening opening) that specifies the display during the round during the big hit game. The number of rounds displayed in "XX" is set. The command B2XX(H) is an effect control command (display command after opening the special winning opening) that specifies the display after the round during the big hit game (display of the interval between the rounds).

The command B400 (H) is an effect control command (a special winning opening winning designation command) that specifies that a game ball has won a special winning opening. The command B401 (H) is an effect control command (special winning prize winning designation command) that specifies that the game ball has won the special winning prize 24. The command B402 (H) is an effect control command (normal start opening winning award specifying command) that specifies that the game ball has won the normal starting winning opening 17.

The command C000 (H) is an effect control command (first effective start winning designation command) indicating that the game ball has won the first starting winning opening 13 in a state where the first reserved memory number has not reached 4. The command C001 (H) is an effect control command (second effective start winning award designation command) indicating that the game ball has won the second starting winning opening 14 in a state where the second number of reserved memories has not reached 4. It should be noted that a command indicating the first reserved memory number may be transmitted as the first valid start winning award designation command, and a command indicating the second reserved memory number may be transmitted as the second valid start winning award designation command. Then, the first effective start prize designation command and the second effective start prize designation command are commands indicating that there is a start prize.

Command C801 (H) is an effect control command (gate passage 1 designation command) that designates that the game ball has passed through the gate 32 during the non-KT state. Command C802 (H) is a production control command (gate passage 2 designation command) that designates that the game ball has passed through the gate 32 during the KT state.

In this embodiment, hereinafter, the gate passage 1 designation command and the gate passage 2 designation command may be collectively expressed as a gate passage designation command.

In this embodiment, the case where the gate passage 1 designation command or the gate passage 2 designation command is transmitted depending on whether or not it is in the KT state has been described, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, a common gate passage designation command may be transmitted regardless of the state including whether or not the state is the KT state.

Command D000 (H) is a production control command (first customer) that specifies that it is in the first customer waiting state (the state in which the first special symbol is not changed and the first reserved memory is not stored). Waiting demo display designation command). Command D001 (H) is a production control command (second customer) that specifies that it is in the second customer waiting state (the state in which the second special symbol is not changed and the second hold memory is not stored). Waiting demo display designation command). The first customer waiting demo display designation command may be a command that can be transmitted only in the normal state. Further, the second customer waiting demonstration display designation command may be a command that can be transmitted only in the KT state.

The command E000(H) is an effect control command (low probability/non-KT background designating command) for designating the background display when the gaming state is the low probability/non-KT state. The command E001 (H) is a production control command (low probability/first KT background designating command) that designates background display when the gaming state is low probability/first KT state. The command E002(H) is a production control command (high accuracy/first KT background designating command) for designating the background display when the gaming state is the high probability/first KT state. The command E003 (H) is a production control command (high-accuracy/second KT background designating command) that designates background display when the gaming state is high probability/second KT state.

Command EE00 (H) is an effect control command (full tank error notification designating command) that specifies to display a full tank error notification. Command EE01 (H) is an effect control command (full tank error cancellation designating command) that specifies canceling the display of the full tank error notification.

The effect control microcomputer 200 (specifically, effect control CPU 201) mounted on the effect control board 80 receives the effect control command described above from the game control microcomputer 560 installed on the main board 31. Then, the display state of the first variable display portion 9a and the second variable display portion 9b and the display state of the background pattern display portion 9c are changed according to the contents shown in FIGS. 16 and 17, and the display state of the lamp is changed. Then, the sound number data is output to the sound output board 70. In addition, effect control commands other than the effect control commands shown in FIGS. 16 and 17 are also transmitted from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80. For example, a more detailed effect control command regarding a big hit game and an effect control command indicating a game state (for example, an effect control command indicating an initialization command) are also transmitted from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80.

FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing an example of a program of the first special symbol process process (step S26A) executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) mounted on the main board 31. As described above, in the first special symbol process process, a process for controlling the first special symbol display device 8a and the special variable winning ball device 20 is executed.

When performing the first special symbol process processing, the CPU 56 has the first starting opening switch 13a for detecting that the game ball has won the first starting winning opening 13 provided in the game board 6 turned on. In other words, that is, if a starting winning in which the game ball wins the first starting winning opening 13 has occurred (step S311), the first starting opening switch passage processing is executed (step S312). After that, the CPU 56 performs any one of steps S300 to S308 according to the internal state (specifically, the value of the first special symbol process flag).

The processes of steps S300 to S308 are the following processes.

First special symbol normal process (step S300): is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 0. When the variable display of the special symbol can be started, the game control microcomputer 560 confirms the number of storages of the numerical data stored in the storage buffer for number of storages (total number of storages for storage). The number of storages of the numerical data stored in the reserved storage number buffer can be confirmed by the count value of the total reserved storage number counter. Also, if the count value of the total pending storage number counter is not 0, it is determined whether or not the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol is a big hit. When making a big hit, the first big hit flag is set. Then, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (1 in this example) according to step S301. The first big hit flag is reset when the big hit game is over.

First variation pattern setting process (step S301): executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 1. In addition, the variation pattern is determined, and the variation time in the variation pattern (variable display time: the time from the start of the variable display until the derived display (stop display) of the display result) is the variation time of the variable display of the special symbol. Decide to do. In addition, the fluctuation time timer which measures the fluctuation time of the special design is started. Then, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (2 in this example) corresponding to step S302.

First display result designation command transmission process (step S302): executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 2. The control for transmitting the display result designation command to the effect control microcomputer 200 is performed. Then, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (3 in this example) corresponding to step S303.

First special symbol variation process (step S303): is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 3. When the variation time of the variation pattern selected in the first variation pattern setting process elapses (the variation time timer set in step S301 times out, that is, the value of the variation time timer becomes 0), the effect control microcomputer 200 Control to transmit the symbol confirmation designation command is performed, and the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (4 in this example) corresponding to step S304. It should be noted that the effect control microcomputer 200 controls the effect display device 9 so that the decorative symbol is stopped when the symbol confirmation designation command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560 is received.

First special symbol stop process (step S304): is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 4. When the first big hit flag is set, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 in this example) corresponding to step S305. If the first big hit flag is not set, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S300. In addition, in this embodiment, based on the value of the special symbol process flag is 4, as will be described later, special symbol display control for stopping and displaying the stop symbol of the special symbol in the special symbol display control process. The data is set in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data, and the stop symbol of the special symbol is actually stopped and displayed in accordance with the setting contents of the output buffer in the display control process of step S22.

First gate passage waiting process (step S305): executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 5. In the first gate passage waiting process, control for waiting passage of the game ball to the gate 32 is performed. When the passage of the game ball to the gate 32 is detected, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 in this example) corresponding to step S306.

First special winning opening opening pre-processing (step S306): executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 6. In the first big winning opening opening pre-processing, control for opening the special variable winning ball device 20 is performed. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the special variable winning ball device 20) is initialized, and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the special winning opening. In addition, the execution time of the first special winning opening opening process is set by the timer, and the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S307 (7 in this example). It should be noted that the first special winning opening opening pre-processing is executed for each round, but when the first round is started, the first special winning opening opening pre-processing is also processing for starting a big hit game.

First big winning opening opening process (step S307): executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 7. The control for transmitting the effect control command of the round display during the big hit game state to the effect control microcomputer 200, the processing for confirming the establishment of the closing condition of the special variable winning ball device 20, and the like are performed. Further, when the game ball wins the special winning opening and the game ball is detected by the first count switch 23a, the control for transmitting the special winning opening winning designation command to the effect control microcomputer 200 is performed. If the closing condition of the special variable winning ball device 20 is satisfied, and if there are still remaining rounds, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S306 (6 in this example). To do. In addition, when all rounds are completed, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (8 in this example) corresponding to step S308.

First jackpot end process (step S308): executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 8. The control for causing the effect control microcomputer 200 to perform display control for notifying the player that the jackpot gaming state has ended. Further, a process of setting a flag indicating a game state (for example, a probability variation flag, a high base flag, a KT flag) is performed. Then, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S300.

FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the starting port switch passage processing in step S312. In the starting opening switch passage processing, the CPU 56 first determines whether or not the first reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value (specifically, the value of the first reserved storage number counter for counting the first reserved storage number). Is 4) or not (step S212). If the first number of reserved storages has reached the upper limit value, the first starting opening switch passage processing is ended as it is.

If the first reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 56 increments the value of the first reserved storage number counter by 1 (step S213), and at the same time, the value of the total reserved storage number counter for counting the total reserved storage number. Is incremented by 1 (step S214). Next, the CPU 56 extracts the values from the random number circuit 503 and the counter for generating the software random number, and stores them in the storage area of the first reserved storage buffer (see FIG. 20) (step S215). .. In the process of step S215, a big hit determination random number (random 1), a big hit type determination random number (random 2), and a variation pattern determination random number (random 5), which are software random numbers, are extracted and stored in the storage area. .. It should be noted that the random number for fluctuation pattern determination (random 5) is not extracted in the first starting port switch passage process (at the time of starting winning) and stored in the storage area in advance, but is extracted at the start of the fluctuation of the first special symbol. You may do it. For example, the game control microcomputer 560 may directly extract a value from a fluctuation pattern determination random number counter for generating a fluctuation pattern determination random number (random 5) in a first fluctuation pattern setting process described later. May be.

FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of an area (reserved storage buffer) for storing random numbers or the like corresponding to the reserved storage. As shown in FIG. 20, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the first reserved storage number is secured in the first reserved storage buffer. In addition, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the second reserved storage number is secured in the second reserved storage buffer. In this embodiment, a big hit determination random number (random 1), a big hit type determination random number (random 2), and a variation pattern determination random number (random 5) are stored in the first pending storage buffer and the second pending storage buffer. To be done. The first pending storage buffer and the second pending storage buffer are formed in the RAM 55.

Then, the control for transmitting the first effective start winning command to the effect control microcomputer 200 is further performed (step S216).

FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol normal process (step S300) in the first special symbol process process. The state in which the first special symbol normal process is executed is a case where the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value indicating step S300. In addition, when the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value indicating step S300, the first special symbol indicator 8a is in a state where the variable display of the first special symbol is not performed, and, This is a case where the first big hit game (the special variable winning ball device 20 is opened a predetermined number of times) is not in progress.

In the first special symbol normal processing, the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) first confirms the value of the first reserved storage number (step S51A). Specifically, the count value of the first reserved storage number counter is confirmed.

If the first number of reserved memories is 0, the first customer waiting demonstration display designation command is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 200 (step S52A).

If the first reserved memory number is not 0, the game control microcomputer 560 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved memory number=1 in the first reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 55, and the RAM 55. In the first random number buffer area (step S53A), decrement the value of the first reserved storage number by 1 (subtract the count value of the first reserved storage number counter by 1), and shift the contents of each storage area. Yes (step S54A). That is, each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number=n (n=2, 3, 4) in the first reserved storage number buffer of the RAM 55 is calculated as follows: Stored in the storage area corresponding to 1. Therefore, the order in which the random number values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the respective first reserved storage numbers are always consistent with the order of the first reserved storage numbers=1, 2, 3, 4. It is like this. That is, in this example, the content of each storage area is shifted each time the variable display start condition is satisfied, so that the order in which each random value is extracted can be specified. In this example, the random number values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the first reserved storage number and the random number values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the second reserved storage number are The extraction order is also saved so that it can be specified.

After that, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a background designation command according to the current game state to the effect control microcomputer 200 (step S55A). Specifically, when the probability variation flag and the high base flag are off, the low probability/non-KT state is determined and the low probability/non-KT background designation command is issued, and the probability variation flag is off and the high base flag is on. In some cases, the low probability/first KT state is determined, and the low probability/first KT background designation command is set. When the certainty variation flag is on and the high base flag is on, the high probability/first KT state is When the probability variation flag is on and the high base flag is off, the high probability/second KT background designation command is determined to be the high probability/second KT background determination command. Send.

Next, the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether or not the big hit of the second special symbol is changing (step S56A). Specifically, when the second big hit flag indicating that the big hit is based on the variation display of the second special symbol is set, it is determined that the big hit of the second special symbol is changing. If it is determined that the big hit of the second special symbol is changing, the process proceeds to step S66A without performing the processes of step S57A and thereafter. As a result, when the variation of the first special symbol is started during the variation of the big hit of the second special symbol, the big hit determination value is stored forcibly regardless of whether it is stored or not.

The method of forcibly disengaging is not limited to the above. For example, when the big hit of the second special symbol is changing in step S56A, a process of setting a random number value (fixed value) that is deviated from the big hit determination random number (random 1) is performed, and the process proceeds to step S58A. It may be forcibly disregarded regardless of which random number (random 1) for jackpot determination has been acquired at the time of starting winning.

In addition to the big hit judgment, in the gaming machine for making a small hit judgment for determining whether or not to make a small hit, when the big hit of the second special symbol is changing at step S56A, steps S57A to S62A Without performing the process of, set a random number value (fixed value) that is out of place as a small hit determination random number (may be the same random number as the big hit determination random number or a completely different random number) The small hit determination may be forcibly disregarded regardless of which big hit determination random number (random 1) was acquired at the time of winning the start prize.

When the big hit of the second special symbol is not changing, the game control microcomputer 560 reads the big hit determination random number (random 1) from the first random number storage buffer (step S57A), and executes the big hit determination module (step S58A). The big hit judging module is a program that decides to make a big hit if the big hit judging random number matches a predetermined big hit judging value. When it is determined to be a big hit (step S59A), the game control microcomputer 560 sets a first big hit flag indicating that it is a big hit based on the variable display of the first special symbol (step S60A). .. Then, based on Random 2, it is determined whether the big hit type is a 16R sure change big hit, a 6R sure change big hit, or a 6R normal big hit (step S61A), the big hit type is stored (step S62A), and the process proceeds to step S66A. .. In addition, when the big hit is not made (that is, when the big hit is not made) in step S59A, the process proceeds to step S66A.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol is not determined to be a big hit, it is unconditionally determined to be all out, but only in such a mode. I can't. For example, even if the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol is not determined to be a big hit, it may be configured to determine a small hit with a low probability.

Then, in step S66A, the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the first variation pattern setting process (step S66A). Although illustration is omitted, the symbol to be stopped is determined just before step S66A.

In addition, in step S58A, it is determined whether or not to make a big hit by using either the non-probability change big hit determination table or the probability change big hit determination table in consideration of the game state.

FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the first variation pattern setting process (step S302) in the first special symbol process process. In the first variation pattern setting process, the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) first confirms whether or not the KT flag indicating the KT state is set (step S1700). If the KT flag is not set (that is, not in the KT state), the game control microcomputer 560 is for the non-KT time shown in FIG. 12A as a variation pattern table for determining the variation pattern. The variation pattern table for the first special symbol is selected (step S1701). If the KT flag is set (that is, if it is in the KT state), the game control microcomputer 560 is the variation pattern table for determining the variation pattern, and is the first for KT time shown in FIG. 12(B). The variable pattern table for 1 special symbol is selected (step S1702).

Next, the game control microcomputer 560, the variation pattern table decided to be used in steps S1701 and S1702, and the variation pattern determination random number (random 5) stored in the first special symbol determination buffer. Based on this, which of the fluctuation patterns shown in FIG. 12 is to be determined is determined (step S1703). In this example, the variation time of the first special symbol is determined by determining the variation pattern. Further, after determining the variation time, the variation pattern in which the determined variation time is set may be selected from a plurality of variation patterns.

When the variation pattern is determined, the game control microcomputer 560 performs control of transmitting a variation pattern command indicating the determined variation pattern to the effect control microcomputer 200 (step S1704).

Further, when the variation time (variation pattern) of the first special symbol is determined in step S1703, the game control microcomputer 560 sets variation time data indicating the determined variation time in the first variation time timer and the variation time. While starting the measurement of (step S1705), the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a is started (step S1706). Then, the game control microcomputer 560 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first display result designation command transmission process (step S1707).

In the first display result designation command transmission process (step S302), the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) determines whether or not to make a big hit, and the big hit type decision result. Control for transmitting any of the display result designation commands (display result 1 designation command, display result 2 designation command, display result 4 designation command, display result 5 designation command) to the production control microcomputer 200 is performed.

FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol changing process (step S303) in the first special symbol process process. In the first special symbol variation process, the CPU 56 first subtracts 1 from the first variation time timer (step S1121A), and when the first variation time timer times out (step S1122A), the symbol is determined in the effect control microcomputer 200. Control to transmit the designated command is performed (step S1123A). Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop process (step S304) (step S1124A).

When the first fluctuation time timer has not timed out, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the big hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 8b (step S1125A). Whether or not the big hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b is, for example, the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop process, It can be determined by checking whether or not the second big hit flag indicating that the big hit is to be set based on the variable display of the second special symbol. If the big hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 8b, the CPU 56 proceeds to step S1123A and performs control for transmitting a symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control microcomputer 200 (step S1123A). , The value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop process (step S304) (step S1124A).

By performing the processing of steps S1125A to S1125A, in this embodiment, if the variable display of the second special symbol becomes a big hit during the execution of the variable display of the first special symbol, the variable display of the first special symbol Is forcibly stopped, so that a situation in which a big hit occurs simultaneously with the first special symbol and the second special symbol does not occur. In this case, on the production control microcomputer 200 side, when the variable display of the first special symbol is forcibly disengaged, the first variable display section 9a displays the first symbol on the basis of the receipt of the symbol fixing designation command. While stopping the stop display of the first decorative design, the control is performed based on the display result 1 designation command transmitted in step S302 to forcibly stop and display the out-of-design as the variable display result of the first decorative design.

In this embodiment, in the first special symbol process process shown in FIG. 18 and the second special symbol process process shown in FIG. 29, for each timer interrupt, the first starting port switch passage process (see step S312). Since the second start opening switch passage process (see step S322) is executed, even when the big hit symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped and displayed, if a new start winning occurs It is configured to store new pending storage.

If the big hit symbol is not derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 8b (N in step S1125A), the process is terminated.

FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol stop processing. In the first special symbol stop processing, first, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the high base number counter indicating the remaining number of times in the high base state is "0" (step S2010), and is "0" , And proceeds to step S2016. When the value of the high base number counter is not "0", that is, when it is in the low probability/first KT state, the CPU 56 subtracts "1" from the value of the high base number counter (step S2011) and becomes "0". It is determined whether or not (step S2012). If the value of the high base number counter does not become "0", the process proceeds to step S2016. When the value of the high base number counter becomes “0”, the CPU 56 resets the high base flag indicating the high base state (step S2013) and also resets the KT flag indicating the KT state. (Step S2015).

In this embodiment, as will be described later, the high base flag is set and the number of times the variable display is executed in the high base state is managed with a low probability at the end of the big hit game based on the 6R normal big hit or the 2R normal big hit. / It is a case where it is controlled to a high base state (low probability/first KT state) and variable display is executed 50 times. In the case of the low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state), when the 50th variation display is completed, it is determined as Y in step S2012, the high base flag is reset in step S2013, and In S2015, the KT flag is also reset, and the low probability/low base state (normal state (non-KT state)) is entered.

In step S2016, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the first big hit flag is set (step S2016). If the first big hit flag is set, the CPU 56 resets the probability variation flag, the high base flag, and the KT flag high base number counter if set (step S2021).

Next, the CPU 56 sets the special winning opening pre-opening timer (step S2022), sets the round 1 opening pattern data according to the big hit type (step S2023), and sets "1" in the round number counter indicating the number of big hits. Is set (step S2024), and the value of the first special symbol process flag is set to a value corresponding to the first gate passage waiting process (step S2025).

When the first big hit flag is not set (N in step S2016), the CPU 56 sets the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol normal processing (step S2026).

Although details will be described later, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed, a right-hand hit notification that prompts the player to shoot a game ball to the right of the game area 7 can be executed. .. Further, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed, as a right hit notification, it is possible to execute a launch promotion notification that prompts the player to shoot a game ball by aiming at the gate 32.

On the contrary, when the passage of the game ball through the gate 32 or the normal start winning opening 17 is detected in the normal state (low probability/non-KT state), the degree of recognition is low (for example, low volume sound output). Or a small screen display), the player may be given a left-hand hit notification that prompts the player to shoot a game ball to the left of the game area 7. On the other hand, in the normal state (low probability/non-KT state), when the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening 14 or the special winning opening 24 is detected, a mode in which the degree of recognition is high (for example, a loud sound) The left-handed notification may be performed by output or large screen display). With such a configuration, it is possible to accurately notify the launch. In particular, with the above configuration, a player who accidentally shoots a game ball to the right of the game area 7 is given a slight left-handed notification while being less aware of the surroundings of the gaming machine. For the player who intentionally performs the right-handed operation, the left-handed notification may be performed in a manner in which the degree of recognition of the surroundings of the gaming machine is high. With such a configuration, it is possible to urge the player who intentionally performs the right-handing operation to return to the left-handing operation from the clerk of the game store.

Further, in the above case, when the number of game balls detected at the gate 32, the normal starting winning opening 17, the second starting winning opening 14, and the special winning opening 24 reaches a certain number, a left-handed notification is given. You may. Further, when the game ball is detected a plurality of times (for example, 5 times) within a predetermined period (for example, 1 minute) at the gate 32 or the normal start winning opening 17, the left-handed notification is given, and the second starting winning opening 14 or the special The winning opening 24 may be configured to perform left-handed notification when a specific number (for example, one) smaller than a predetermined number of game balls is detected.

In addition, for example, the external signal is not output in the detection of the game ball at the gate 32 or the normal start winning opening 17, while the external signal is detected in the detection of the game ball at the second starting winning opening 14 or the special winning opening 24. It may be configured to output.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the demo display is performed when a specific condition is satisfied, but when the demo display is performed in the normal state, the gate 32, the normal start winning opening 17, and the second starting winning opening are performed. When the winning of the game ball to 14 or the special winning opening 24 is detected, the execution of the demonstration display which has been executed may be ended and the left-handed notification may be given.

FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the first gate passage waiting process (step S305) in the special symbol process process. In the first gate passage waiting process, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the detection signal from the gate switch 32a is input (step S2501). If the detection signal from the gate switch 32a has not been input, the processing is ended as it is. If the detection signal from the gate switch 32a is input, the CPU 56 transmits the first big hit start designation command (step S2502), and the value of the first special symbol process flag corresponds to the first special winning opening opening preprocessing. The set value is set (step S2503).

In this embodiment, by executing the first gate passage waiting process, when the big hit symbol is derived and displayed as the variable display result of the first special symbol, the big hit game is not started immediately, but the gate 32 is displayed. It is configured to shift to the big hit game on condition that the game ball passes and is detected by the gate switch 32a.

FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing a first special winning opening opening pre-process (step S306) in the special symbol process process. In the first special winning opening opening preprocessing, the CPU 56 decrements the value of the special winning opening opening timer by -1 (step S1401). In addition, when it is before the start of the round 1, the process of step S1401 is executed, whereby the value of the special winning opening pre-opening timer set in step S2022 of the first special symbol stop process is measured. The jackpot display time (fanfare period) before the start of the round 1 will be measured. In addition, in the case of the round 1 or later, the process of step S1401 is executed to measure the value of the timer before opening the special winning opening set in the process during opening of the special winning opening. (Except after the final round) will be measured.

In this embodiment, the big hit display time (fanfare period) and the interval period are measured by using a common time measuring timer, but the big hit display time (fanfare period) and the interval period are separately provided. The timer may be used to measure time.

Next, when the timer before opening the special winning opening times out (the value of the time measuring timer is 0) (step S1411), the CPU 56 sets the current round number in the EXT data of the command for opening special winning opening. , Control for transmission to the effect control microcomputer 200 is performed (step S1412).

Next, the CPU 56 initializes a winning number counter for counting the number of winning game balls to the special winning opening (step S1413). That is, the value of the winning number counter is set to 0.

Next, the CPU 56 controls the special winning opening to the open state (step S1414). Specifically, the solenoid 21 is driven to open the special variable winning ball device 20.

Next, the CPU 56 sets an opening time corresponding to the type of jackpot and the starting round in an opening time timer for measuring the opening time of the special winning opening (step S1415).

Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special winning opening opening process (step S307) (step S1416).

27 and 28 are flowcharts showing the first jackpot end process (step S308) in the special symbol process process. In the first big hit ending process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the big hit end display timer is set (step S2200A), and if the big hit end display timer is set, moves to step S2204A. When the big hit end display timer is not set, the first big hit flag is reset (step S2201A), and the control for transmitting the first big hit end designation command is performed (step S2202A). Then, the jackpot end display timer is set to a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time during which the jackpot end display is being performed on the effect display device 9 (jackpot end display time) (step S2203A), and the process is ended.

In step S2204A, the value of the jackpot end display timer is decremented by 1 (step S2204A). Then, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the value of the big hit end display timer is 0, that is, whether the big hit end display time has elapsed (step S2205A). If not, the process ends.

If the jackpot end display time has passed (Y in step S2205A), the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the type of the jackpot that has ended this time is the 16R certainty variation jackpot (step S2206A). Whether or not the 16R probability variation big hit can be determined by, for example, checking the big hit type stored in step S62A of the first special symbol normal process. If the 16R probability variation big hit, the CPU 56 sets a probability variation flag indicating a probability variation state to shift to a probability variation state (high probability state) (step S2207A), and sets a KT flag indicating a KT state. Then, the state shifts to the KT state (step S2208A). Then, the process proceeds to step S2223A. In the case of the 16R probability variation big hit, since the high base flag is not set, the high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state) is controlled.

If it is not the 16R probability variation big hit, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the type of the jackpot completed this time is 6R probability variation big hit (step S2209A). Whether or not the 6R probability variation big hit can be determined by, for example, checking the big hit type stored in step S62A of the first special symbol normal process. If the 6R probability variation big hit, the CPU 56 sets the probability variation flag and shifts to the probability variation state (high probability state) (step S2212A), and sets the high base flag to shift to the high base state (step S2213A). Further, the KT flag is set to shift to the KT state (step S2214A). Then, the process proceeds to step S2223A. Therefore, in the case of the 6R certainty variation jackpot, it is controlled to a high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state).

In the case of a 6R probability variation big hit, only the high base flag is set and the high base number counter is not set. In this case, the high base number counter is reset to 0 when starting the big hit game (see step S2021 of the first special symbol stop processing), so the value of the high base number counter remains 0. Therefore, after the jackpot game based on 6R probability variation jackpot is controlled to a high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state), and the value of the high base number counter is 0 in the subsequent variable display, It is determined as Y in step S2010 of the first special symbol stop processing, and the subtraction processing of the high base number counter in step S2011 is not performed. Then, the high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state) is maintained until the next big hit occurs.

If it is not the 6R probability variation big hit (that is, if it is the 6R normal big hit), the CPU 56 sets the high base flag to shift to the high base state (step S2219A) and sets the KT flag to shift to the KT state. (Step S2220A). Further, the CPU 56 sets "50" in the high base number counter (step S2221A). Then, the process proceeds to step S2223A. Therefore, in the case of a 6R normal big hit, it is controlled to a low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state).

Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol normal process (step S300) (step S2223A).

FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing an example of a program of the second special symbol process process (step S26B) executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) mounted on the main board 31. As described above, in the second special symbol process process, the process for controlling the second special symbol display device 8b, the special variable winning ball device 20, and the special variable winning ball device 22 is executed.

CPU56, when performing the second special symbol process processing, the second start opening switch 14a for detecting that the game ball has won the second start winning opening 14 provided in the game board 6 is turned on. In other words, that is, if the starting winning that the game ball wins the second starting winning opening 14 has occurred (step S321), the second starting opening switch passage processing is executed (step S322). In addition, if the "first" of the first starting port switch passing process shown in FIG. 19 is read as "second", the second starting port switch passing process will be described. After that, the CPU 56 performs any one of steps S350 to S361 according to the internal state (specifically, the value of the second special symbol process flag).

The processing of steps S350 to S361 is the following processing.

Second special symbol normal processing (step S350): is executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 0. When the variable display of the special symbol can be started, the game control microcomputer 560 confirms the number of storages of the numerical data stored in the storage buffer for number of storages (total number of storages for storage). The number of storages of the numerical data stored in the reserved storage number buffer can be confirmed by the count value of the total reserved storage number counter. Moreover, if the count value of the total pending storage number counter is not 0, it is determined whether or not the display result of the variable display of the second special symbol is a big hit. When making a big hit, the second big hit flag is set. When the big hit is not made, it is determined whether or not the display result of the variable display of the second special symbol is the small hit. When it is a small hit, the small hit flag is set. Then, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (1 in this example) according to step S351. The second jackpot flag is reset when the jackpot game is over. Further, the small hit flag is reset when the small hit game is over.

Second variation pattern setting process (step S351): executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 1. In addition, the variation pattern is determined, and the variation time in the variation pattern (variable display time: the time from the start of the variable display until the derived display (stop display) of the display result) is the variation time of the variable display of the special symbol. Decide to do. In addition, the fluctuation time timer which measures the fluctuation time of the special design is started. Then, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (2 in this example) corresponding to step S352.

Second display result designation command transmission process (step S352): executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 2. The control for transmitting the display result designation command to the effect control microcomputer 200 is performed. Then, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (3 in this example) corresponding to step S353.

Second special symbol fluctuation process (step S353): is executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 3. When the variation time of the variation pattern selected in the second variation pattern setting process elapses (the variation time timer set in step S351 times out, that is, the value of the variation time timer becomes 0), the effect control microcomputer 200 Control to transmit the symbol confirmation designation command is performed, and the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (4 in this example) corresponding to step S304. It should be noted that the effect control microcomputer 200 controls the effect display device 9 so that the decorative symbol is stopped when the symbol confirmation designation command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560 is received.

Second special symbol stop process (step S354): is executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 4. When the second big hit flag is set, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 in this example) corresponding to step S355. When the small hit flag is set, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (9 in this example) corresponding to step S359. When neither the second big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set (when it is off (including the case of forced off)), the internal state (second special symbol process flag) corresponds to step S350. Update to the value (0 in this example). In addition, in this embodiment, based on the value of the special symbol process flag is 4, as will be described later, special symbol display control for stopping and displaying the stop symbol of the special symbol in the special symbol display control process. The data is set in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data, and the stop symbol of the special symbol is actually stopped and displayed in accordance with the setting contents of the output buffer in the display control process of step S22.

Second gate passage waiting process (step S355): executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 5. In the second gate passage waiting process, control for waiting passage of the game ball to the gate 32 is performed. When the passage of the game ball to the gate 32 is detected, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (6 in this example) corresponding to step S356.

Second special winning opening opening preprocessing (step S356): executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 6. In the second big winning opening opening pre-processing, control for opening the special variable winning ball device 20 is performed. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the special variable winning ball device 20) is initialized, and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the special winning opening. Further, the execution time of the second special winning opening opening process is set by the timer, and the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value (7 in this example) corresponding to step S357. The second special winning opening opening preprocessing is executed for each round, but when the first round is started, the second special winning opening opening preprocessing is also processing for starting a big hit game.

Second big winning opening opening process (step S357): executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 7. The control for transmitting the effect control command of the round display during the big hit game state to the effect control microcomputer 200, the processing for confirming the establishment of the closing condition of the special variable winning ball device 20, and the like are performed. Further, when the game ball wins the special winning opening and the game ball is detected by the first count switch 23a, the control for transmitting the special winning opening winning designation command to the effect control microcomputer 200 is performed. If the closing condition of the special variable winning ball device 20 is satisfied, and if there are still remaining rounds, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S356 (6 in this example). To do. In addition, when all rounds are finished, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (8 in this example) corresponding to step S358.

Second big hit ending process (step S358): executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 8. The control for causing the effect control microcomputer 200 to perform display control for notifying the player that the jackpot gaming state has ended. Further, a process of setting a flag indicating a game state (for example, a probability variation flag, a high base flag, a KT flag) is performed. Then, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S300.

Second small hit opening pretreatment (step S359): executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 9. In the second small hit opening pre-processing, control for opening the special variable winning ball device 22 is performed. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the special winning opening 24) is initialized, and the solenoid 106 is driven to set the special variable winning ball device 22 to open control. In addition, the execution time of the second small hit opening processing is set by the timer, and the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value (10 (decimal number) in this example) corresponding to step S360. The second small hit opening pre-process is also a process for starting a small hit game.

Second small hit open process (step S360): executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 10. A process for confirming the establishment of the closing condition of the special variable winning ball device 22 is performed. In this embodiment, the closing condition is satisfied when the opening time of the special variable winning ball device 22 is 0.8 seconds (see FIG. 15). In addition, when the game ball is won in the special winning opening and the game ball is detected by the second count switch 25a, control for transmitting a special winning opening winning designation command to the effect control microcomputer 200 is performed. When the closing condition is satisfied, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S361 (11 (decimal number) in this example).

Second small hit end process (step S361): executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 11. The control for causing the effect control microcomputer 200 to perform the display control for informing the player that the small hitting game state has ended. Then, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S300.

FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing a second special symbol normal process (step S350) in the second special symbol process process. The state in which the second special symbol normal process is executed is a case where the value of the second special symbol process flag is the value indicating step S350. When the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value indicating step S350, the second special symbol indicator 8b is in a state where the variable display of the second special symbol is not performed, and, This is a case where neither the second big hit game (the special variable winning ball device 20 is opened a predetermined number of times) nor the small hit game (the special variable winning ball device 22 is opened) is being played.

In the second special symbol normal processing, the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) first confirms the value of the second reserved storage number (step S51B). Specifically, the count value of the second reserved storage number counter is confirmed.

If the second number of reserved memories is 0, the second customer waiting demonstration display designation command is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 200 (step S52B).

If the second reserved memory number is not 0, the game control microcomputer 560 reads each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved memory number=1 in the second reserved memory number buffer of the RAM55, and the RAM55. In the second random number buffer area (step S53B), the value of the second reserved storage number is decremented by 1 (the count value of the second reserved storage number counter is decremented by 1), and the content of each storage area is shifted. Yes (step S54B). That is, each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number=n (n=2, 3, 4) in the second reserved storage number buffer of the RAM 55 is set to the second reserved storage number=n−. Stored in the storage area corresponding to 1. Therefore, the order in which the random number values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the respective second reserved storage numbers are always consistent with the order of the second reserved storage numbers=1, 2, 3, 4. It is like this. That is, in this example, the content of each storage area is shifted each time the variable display start condition is satisfied, so that the order in which each random value is extracted can be specified.

After that, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a background designation command according to the current game state to the effect control microcomputer 200 (step S55B). The specific method of transmitting the background designation command is the same as the processing shown in step S55A of the first special symbol normal processing.

Next, the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether or not the big hit of the first special symbol is changing (step S56B). Specifically, it is determined that the big hit of the first special symbol is changing when the first big hit flag indicating that it is a big hit based on the variation display of the first special symbol is set. When it is determined that the big hit of the first special symbol is changing, the process proceeds to step S66B without performing the processes of step S57B and subsequent steps. As a result, when the fluctuation of the second special symbol is started during the big hit fluctuation of the first special symbol, the big hit determination value is stored regardless of whether it is stored or not.

The method of forcibly disengaging is not limited to the above. For example, when the big hit of the first special symbol is changing in step S56B, a process of setting a random number value (fixed value) that is out of alignment as the big hit determination random number (random 1) is performed, and the process proceeds to step S58B. It may be forcibly disregarded regardless of which random number (random 1) for jackpot determination has been acquired at the time of starting winning.

In addition, when the big hit variation of the first special symbol is in step S56B, the small hit determination random number (the same random number as the big hit determination random number may be used without performing the processes of steps S57B to S62B. , Which may be a completely different random number), by setting a random number value (fixed value) that is out of order and performing a small hit judgment, it is possible to determine which big hit judgment random number (random 1) was acquired at the time of winning the start prize. Regardless, it may be forcibly deviated.

When the big hit of the first special symbol is not changing, the game control microcomputer 560 reads the big hit determination random number (random 1) from the second random number storage buffer (step S57B) and executes the big hit determination module (step S58B). The big hit judging module is a program that decides to make a big hit if the big hit judging random number matches a predetermined big hit judging value. When it is determined to be a big hit (step S59B), the game control microcomputer 560 sets a second big hit flag indicating that it is a big hit based on the variable display of the second special symbol (step S60B). .. Then, based on the random 2, it is determined whether the big hit type is 16R certainty change big hit, 9R certainty change big hit, 2R certainty change big hit, or 2R normal big hit (step S61B), and the big hit type is stored (step S62B). The process moves to S66B.

If the big hit is not made in step S59B, the game control microcomputer 560 executes the small hit determination module (step S63B). The small hitting determination module is a program that decides to make a small hit if the big hitting random number (may be a small hitting random number) matches a predetermined small hitting determination value. When it is determined to be a small hit (step S64B), the game control microcomputer 560 sets a small hit flag indicating that the small hit will be made based on the variable display of the second special symbol (step S65B). ). Then, the process proceeds to step S66B.

Then, in step S66B, the value of the second special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the second variation pattern setting process (step S66B). Although illustration is omitted, the symbol to be stopped is determined immediately before step S66B.

In addition, in step S58B, it is determined whether or not to make a big hit by using either the non-probability variation big hit determination table or the probability variation big hit determination table in consideration of the game state.

The second variation pattern setting process (step S351) is the same as the first variation pattern setting process (step S301) shown in FIG. That is, in the first variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 22, if “first” is read as “second”, the second variation pattern process is explained. However, in the second variation pattern setting process, the CPU 56 first performs the same process as in step S1700, and confirms whether or not the KT flag is set. If the KT flag is not set (that is, not in the KT state), the game control microcomputer 560 uses a variation pattern table for determining the variation pattern for non-KT time shown in FIG. 13(C). The variable pattern table for the second special symbol is selected. If the KT flag is set (that is, if it is in the KT state), the game control microcomputer 560 sets a variation pattern according to whether or not the probability variation flag and the high base flag are set, and the number of variations. As the variation pattern table for determining, the variation pattern table for the second special symbol for any of the KT times shown in FIGS. 13(D) to 14(I) is selected. For example, if the probability variation flag is off and the high base flag is on (low probability/first KT state), if it is the first variation, select the second special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 13(D). Then, if it is the 2nd to 49th variation, select the variation pattern table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 13(E), and if it is the 50th variation, the variation pattern table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 13(F). Select. Further, for example, if both the probability variation flag and the high base flag are on (high probability/first KT state), if it is the first variation, the variation pattern table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 14(G) Is selected, and if it is the second variation or later, the variation pattern table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 14(H) is selected. Further, for example, if the probability variation flag is on and the high base flag is off (high probability/second KT state), the second special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 14(I) is selected.

In the second display result designation command transmission process (step S352), the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) determines whether to make a big hit or a small hit, and a big hit type decision result. Based on the control, control for transmitting any of the display result designation commands (display result 1 designation command to display result 3 designation command, display result 6 designation command to display result 8 designation command) to the production control microcomputer 200 is performed. ..

The second special symbol changing process (step S353) is the same as the first special symbol changing process (step S303) shown in FIG. That is, in the first special symbol variation process shown in FIG. 23, if "first" is read as "second", the second special symbol variation process is explained.

The second gate passage waiting process (step S355) is the same as the first gate passage waiting process (step S305) shown in FIG. That is, in the first gate passage waiting process shown in FIG. 25, if "first" is read as "second", the second gate passage waiting process is explained.

The second special winning opening opening preprocessing (step S356) is the same as the first special winning opening opening preprocessing (step S305) shown in FIG. That is, in the first special winning opening opening pre-processing shown in FIG. 26, the second special winning opening opening pre-processing is explained by replacing "1" with "second".

31 and 32 are flowcharts showing the second jackpot end process (step S358) in the special symbol process process. In the second big hit ending process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the big hit end display timer is set (step S2200B), and if the big hit end display timer is set, moves to step S2204B. When the big hit end display timer is not set, the second big hit flag is reset (step S2201B), and control for transmitting the second big hit end designation command is performed (step S2202B). Then, the big hit end display timer is set to a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time when the big hit end display is being performed on the effect display device 9 (big hit end display time) (step S2203B), and the process is ended.

In step S2204B, the value of the jackpot end display timer is decremented by 1 (step S2204B). Then, the CPU 56 confirms whether the value of the big hit end display timer is 0, that is, whether the big hit end display time has elapsed (step S2205B). If not, the process ends.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (Y in step S2205B), the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the type of the jackpot that has ended this time is the 16R certainty variation jackpot (step S2206B). Whether or not the 16R probability variation big hit can be determined by, for example, checking the big hit type stored in step S62B of the second special symbol normal processing. If the 16R probability variation big hit, the CPU 56 sets the probability variation flag to shift to the probability variation state (high probability state) (step S2207B), and sets the KT flag to shift to the KT state (step S2208B). Then, the process proceeds to step S2223B. In the case of the 16R certainty variation big hit or the 2R certainty variation big hit, the high base flag is not set, so the high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state) is controlled.

If it is not the 16R certainty variation jackpot, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the type of the big hit completed this time is the 9R certainty variation jackpot (step S2209B). Whether or not it is the 9R certainty variation jackpot or the 2R certainty variation jackpot can be determined, for example, by confirming the jackpot type stored in step S62B of the second special symbol normal processing. If it is the 9R probability variation big hit or the 2R probability variation big hit, the CPU 56 sets the probability variation flag and shifts to the probability variation state (high probability state) (step S2212B), and sets the high base flag to shift to the high base state ( In step S2213B), the KT flag is set and the state shifts to the KT state (step S2214B). Then, the process proceeds to step S2223B. Therefore, in the case of the 9R certainty variation big hit or the 2R certainty variation big hit, it is controlled to a high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state).

In the case of the 9R probability variation big hit or the 2R probability variation big hit, only the high base flag is set and the high base number counter is not set. In this case, the high base number counter is reset to 0 when the big hit game is started (the same process as step S2021 is executed in the second special symbol stop process), so the value of the high base number counter is 0. It remains. Therefore, after the big hit game based on the 9R probability change big hit or the 2R probability change big hit, it is controlled to a high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state), and the value of the high base number counter is 0 in the subsequent variable display. Therefore, in the second special symbol stop process, it is determined to be Y in the same process as step S2010, and the high base number counter subtraction process of the same process as step S2011 is not performed. Then, the high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state) is maintained until the next big hit occurs.

If it is neither 9R probability big hit or 2R probability big hit (that is, 2R normal big hit), the CPU 56 sets the high base flag to shift to the high base state (step S2219B) and sets the KT flag. To shift to the KT state (step S2220B). Further, the CPU 56 sets "50" in the high base number counter (step S2221B). Then, the process proceeds to step S2223B. Therefore, in the case of a 2R normal big hit, the probability is controlled to be a low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state).

Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol normal process (step S350) (step S2223B).

Here, the transition of the game state in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 33 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a method of transition of a game state in this embodiment. First, in this embodiment, in a low-probability/low-base state (normal state (non-KT state)), the player aims at the left side of the game area 7 and performs a game ball firing operation (left hitting). Therefore, in the normal state, a start winning to the first starting winning opening 13 mainly occurs, and the variable display of the first special symbol is mainly executed. Also, since the variable display of the first special symbol is mainly executed, when a big hit occurs in the low probability/low base state, 16R certainty variation big hit, 6R certainty variation big hit, or 6R normal big hit occurs mainly.

As shown in FIG. 33, when the 16R probability variation big hit occurs in the low probability/low base state, the high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state) is entered after the end of the big hit game, and the next The high probability/low base state is maintained until a big hit occurs (see steps S2206A to S2208A). In addition, when the 6R certainty variation big hit occurs in the low probability/low base state, it shifts to the high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state) after the end of the big hit game until the next big hit occurs. The high probability/high base state is maintained (see steps S2209A and S2212A to S2214A). In addition, when the 6R normal big hit occurs in the low probability/low base state, after the big hit game is over, the state shifts to the low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state) and the next big hit occurs. The low-probability/high-base state is maintained until the variable display of 50 times is completed (see steps S2219A to S2221A).

If the player has moved to the KT state (high-probability/high-base state, low-probability/high-base state, high-probability/low-base state), in this embodiment, the player moves to the right of the game area 7. Aim and launch the game ball to the right. Therefore, in the KT state, a start winning is mainly generated in the second starting winning opening 14, and a variable display of the second special symbol is mainly executed. Further, since the variable display of the second special symbol is mainly executed, when a big hit occurs in the KT state, mainly a 16R sure change big hit, a 9R sure change big hit, a 2R sure change big hit, or a 2R normal big hit occurs.

As shown in FIG. 33, when the 16R probability variation big hit occurs in the high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state), the high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT) after the big hit game is finished. State), and the high probability/low base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps S2206B to S2208B). In addition, in the high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state), if a 9R certainty variation jackpot or a 2R certainty variation jackpot occurs, the high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state) after the jackpot game is over. ), and the high probability/high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps S2209B and S2212B to S2214B). In this embodiment, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the probability of being the 9R certainty variation jackpot or the 2R certainty variation jackpot is 55% in total (see FIG. 11), so once the high probability /In the high base state, the high probability/high base state loops at a rate of 55%. Also, when a 2R normal big hit occurs in a high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state), it shifts to a low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state) after the big hit game is over. , The low probability/high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs or the variable display of 50 times is completed (see steps S2219B to S2221B).

As shown in FIG. 33, when a 16R probability variation big hit occurs in a low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state), a high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT) occurs after the big hit game is finished. State), and the high-probability/low-base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps S2206B to S2208B). In addition, in the case of a low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state), if a 9R certainty variation jackpot or a 2R certainty variation jackpot occurs, the high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state) after the jackpot game is over. ), the high probability/high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps S2209B, S2212B to S2214B). Also, when a 2R normal big hit occurs in the low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state), it shifts to the low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state) after the end of the big hit game. , The low probability/high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs or the variable display of 50 times is completed (see steps S2219B to S2221B). In this embodiment, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the probability of being a 2R normal jackpot is 35% (see FIG. 11), so once the low probability/high base state is reached. The low probability/high base state will loop at a rate of 35%. In addition, after the 6R normal big hit and the 2R normal big hit have occurred and the low probability/high base state has been achieved, when the next big hit does not occur and the variable display of 50 times is finished, as shown in FIG. 33. To a low probability/low base state (normal state (non-KT state)) (see steps S2010 to S2015).

As shown in FIG. 33, when the 16R probability variation jackpot occurs in the high-probability/low-base state (high-probability/second KT state), the high-probability/low-base state (high-probability/second KT) occurs after the jackpot game is over. State), and the high-probability/low-base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps S2206B to S2208B). In addition, in this embodiment, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the probability of 16R probability variation big hit is 10%. (See FIG. 11) Once the high probability/low base state is reached, the high probability/low base state is looped at a rate of 10%. Also, in the high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state), if a 9R certainty variation jackpot or a 2R certainty variation jackpot occurs, the high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state) after the jackpot game is over. ), the high probability/high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps S2209B, S2212B to S2214B). Also, when a 2R normal jackpot occurs in a high-probability/low-base state (high-probability/second KT state), it shifts to a low-probability/high-base state (low probability/first KT state) after the jackpot game ends. , The low probability/high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs or the variable display of 50 times is completed (see steps S2219B to S2221B).

In FIG. 33, the low probability/low base state (normal state (non-KT state)) describes the case where the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, but the variable display of the second special symbol is low at a low rate. It may be executed. In this case, when the 16R probability variation big hit occurs, the state shifts to a high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state). Further, when the 9R certainty variation big hit or the 2R certainty variation big hit occurs, the state shifts to the high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state). Also, when a 2R normal big hit occurs, it shifts to a low-probability/high-base state (low-probability/first KT state), and the low-probability/high until the next big hit occurs or the 50 times of variable display is completed. The base state will be maintained.

Further, in FIG. 33, the case where the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state) has been described, but the variable display of the first special symbol is executed at a low rate. There is a possibility that it will be done. In this case, when the 16R probability variation big hit occurs, the state shifts to a high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state). Further, when the 6R certainty variation big hit occurs, the state shifts to the high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state). In addition, when the 6R normal big hit occurs, it shifts to a low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state), and the low probability/high until the next big hit occurs or 50 times of variable display is completed. The base state will be maintained.

Further, in FIG. 33, the case where the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state) has been described, but the variable display of the first special symbol is executed at a low rate. There is a possibility that it will be done. In this case, when the 16R probability variation big hit occurs, the state shifts to a high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state). Further, when the 6R certainty variation big hit occurs, the state shifts to the high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state). In addition, when the 6R normal big hit occurs, it shifts to a low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state), and the low probability/high until the next big hit occurs or 50 times of variable display is completed. The base state will be maintained.

Further, in FIG. 33, the case where the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state) has been described, but the variable display of the first special symbol is executed at a low rate. There is a possibility that they will be In this case, when the 16R probability variation big hit occurs, the state shifts to a high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state). Further, when the 6R certainty variation big hit occurs, the state shifts to the high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state). In addition, when the 6R normal big hit occurs, it shifts to a low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state), and the low probability/high until the next big hit occurs or 50 times of variable display is completed. The base state will be maintained.

34 is a flowchart showing an example of a program of special symbol display control processing (step S36) executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) mounted on the main board 31. In the special symbol display control process, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag is 3 (that is, whether or not the special symbol changing process is being executed) (step S3201). If the value of the special symbol process flag is 3 (that is, during the execution of the special symbol changing process), the CPU 56 sets the special symbol display control data for the special symbol display control for the special symbol display control data. A process of setting or updating the output buffer is performed (step S3202). In this case, the CPU 56 sets or updates the special symbol display control data for performing variable display of the special symbol. For example, if the changing speed is 1 frame/0.2 seconds, the value of the special symbol display control data set in the output buffer is incremented by 1 every 0.2 seconds. Then, after that, the display control process (see step S22) is executed, and the drive signal is output to the special symbol display devices 8a and 8b according to the contents of the output buffer for the special symbol display control data setting. The variable display of the special symbols on the special symbol display devices 8a and 8b is executed.

If the value of the special symbol process flag is not 3, the CPU 56 confirms whether the value of the special symbol process flag is 4 (that is, whether or not the special symbol stop process is being executed) (step S3203). ). If the value of the special symbol process flag is 4 (that is, in the case of shifting to the special symbol stop process), the CPU 56 is a special symbol for stopping and displaying the stop symbol of the special symbol set in the special symbol normal process. A process of setting the display control data in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data is performed (step S3204). In this case, the CPU 56 sets the special symbol display control data for stopping and displaying the stop symbol of the special symbol. Then, after that, the display control process (see step S22) is executed, and the drive signal is output to the special symbol display devices 8a and 8b according to the contents of the output buffer for the special symbol display control data setting. The stop symbols of the special symbols are stopped and displayed on the special symbol display devices 8a and 8b. In addition, since the setting data is not changed after the process of step S3204 is executed and the special symbol display control data for the stop symbol display is set, the latest special symbol display control data is displayed in the display control process of step S22. Based on this, the latest stop symbol will be stopped and displayed until the next variable display is started. If the value of the special symbol process flag is either 2 or 3 in step S3201 (that is, either the display result designation command transmission process or the special symbol changing process), for the special symbol variation display. The special symbol display control data may be updated. In this case, in order not to cause a discrepancy between the fluctuation time recognized on the game control microcomputer 560 side and the fluctuation time recognized on the effect control microcomputer 200 side, fluctuation also occurs in the display result designation command transmission process. The time timer may be configured to be decremented by 1.

In this embodiment, the case where the special symbol display control data is set in the output buffer according to the value of the special symbol process flag is shown, but in the special symbol process process, the start flag is set at the start of variation of the special symbol. At the same time, the end flag may be set at the end of the variation of the special symbol. Then, in the special symbol display control process (step S36), the CPU 56 starts updating the value of the special symbol display control data based on the start flag being set, and based on the end flag being set. The special symbol display control data for stopping and displaying the stop symbol may be set.

Next, the normal symbol process process (step S29) executed by the game control microcomputer 560 will be described. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing an example of a normal symbol process process. In the normal symbol process processing, the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) detects that the game ball has passed through the gate 32 and the gate switch 32a has been turned on (step S5111), KT It is confirmed whether or not the flag is set (step S5112). If the KT flag is not set (that is, if it is in the non-KT state), the CPU 56 controls to transmit the gate passage 1 designation command to the effect control microcomputer 200 (step S5113). If the KT flag is set (that is, in the KT state), the CPU 56 performs control for transmitting a gate passage 2 designation command to the effect control microcomputer 200 (step S5114). Then, the CPU 56 executes the gate/normal starting opening switch passage processing (step S5112).

If the gate switch 32a is not in the ON state, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the game ball has entered the normal start winning opening 17 and the normal starting opening switch 17a has been turned on (step S5115). When detecting that the normal starting opening switch 17a is turned on, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the normal starting opening winning designation command to the effect control microcomputer 200 (step S5116). Then, the CPU 56 executes the gate/normal starting opening switch passage processing (step S5112).

In this embodiment, when the passage of the game ball to the gate 32 is detected by executing the processing of steps S5111-S5114, the gate passage 1 designation command or the gate passage 1 designation command depending on whether or not the state is the KT state. A gate pass 2 designation command is transmitted. In addition, in this embodiment, the gate 32 is configured as a dual-purpose gate and also plays a role of an operating area. However, whether or not it is in a gate passage waiting state before the big hit game is started after the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed. Regardless of this (only based on whether or not it is in the KT state), the gate passage 1 designation command or the gate passage 2 designation command is transmitted.

Then, the CPU 56 executes any one of the processes shown in steps S5100 to S5104 according to the value of the normal symbol process flag.

In addition, in this embodiment, regardless of whether or not it is in the gate passage waiting state, when the passage of the game ball to the gate 32 is detected in step S5111, the gate/normal start opening switch passage processing of step S5117 is performed. It is executed and the variable display of the normal symbol is executed, but it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, when the game ball passes through the gate 32 when not in the gate passage waiting state, the variable display of the ordinary symbol is executed, and in the state of waiting for the gate passage, the variation of the ordinary symbol even if the game ball passes through the gate 32. The display may not be executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, the gate 32 is normally used as a combined use gate of the starting region and the operating region, but the special symbol process process (see steps S26A and S26B) in the timer interrupt process is the ordinary symbol. Since it is executed before the process process (see step S26C), the detection process of the passage of the game ball of the gate 32 as the normal starting region is performed after the detection process of the passage of the game ball of the gate 32 as the operating region is performed. Done. Therefore, the process for starting the big hit game can be executed quickly.

Gate/normal start opening switch passage processing (step S5117): The CPU 56 counts a gate passage memory counter (a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed through the gate 32 and the number of game balls that have won the normal start winning opening 17). It is confirmed whether or not the value (the number of memory passing through the gate) has reached the maximum value (“4” in this example). If the maximum value has not been reached, the count value of the gate passage storage counter is incremented by one. In addition, the LED of the normal symbol reservation storage indicator 41 is turned on according to the value of the gate passage storage counter. Then, the CPU 56 extracts the value of the random number per normal symbol (random 4), and stores it in the storage area (normal symbol determination buffer) corresponding to the value of the number of gate passage memories.

Normal symbol normal processing (step S5100): CPU56, a state in which the variation of the normal symbol can be started (for example, if the value of the normal symbol process flag is the value indicating step S100, specifically, the normal symbol) If the variable display of the normal symbol is not made on the display device 10, and the variable winning ball device 15 is not opened/closed based on the fact that the normal symbol display device 10 hits and displays the symbol), the gate passage memory is stored. Check the value of the number. Specifically, the count value of the gate passage memory number counter is confirmed. If the gate passing memory number is not 0, it is determined whether or not to win (whether or not the stop symbol of the normal symbol is to be the hit symbol). Then, the variable time of the normal symbol is set in the normal symbol process timer, and the timer is started. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically, "1") indicating the normal symbol variation process (step S5101).

Normal symbol variation process (step S5101): The CPU 56 confirms whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out, and if it has timed out, sets a normal symbol stop symbol display time in the normal symbol process timer and starts the timer. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically "2") indicating the normal symbol stop process (step S5102).

Normal symbol stop process (step S5102): The CPU 56 confirms whether or not the normal symbol process timer times out, and if it has timed out, confirms whether or not the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol. If it is not a winning symbol (if it is a deviating symbol), the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically "0") indicating the normal symbol normal process (step S5100). On the other hand, if the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol, the normal symbol process timer is set to the time before the normal electric accessory release, and the timer is started. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically, “3”) indicating the normal electric accessory release preprocessing (step S5103).

Normal electric accessory release pre-processing (step S5103): The CPU 56 confirms whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out, and if it has timed out, sets the normal electric auditors product operating time to the normal symbol process timer, and the timer To start the opening of the variable winning ball device 15. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically, "4") indicating the normal electric auditors product operating process (step S5104).

Normal electric auditors product operation process (step S5104): The CPU 56 measures the normal symbol process timer, and when the normal symbol process timer times out, closes the variable winning ball device 15. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically "0") indicating the normal symbol normal process (step S5100).

FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing a normal symbol normal process (step S5100). In the normal symbol normal process, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the gate passage memory number is 0 by confirming the count value of the gate passage memory number counter (step S5121). If the gate passage memory number is 0 (Y in step S5121), the process ends. If the gate passage memory number is not 0 (N in step S5121), the CPU 56 reads the normal symbol per determination random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the gate passage memory number=1 (step S5122). Then, the CPU 56 decrements the value of the gate passage memory number counter by 1 and shifts the content of each storage area (step S5123). That is, the random number for normal symbol determination stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of gate passage memory=n (n=2, 3, 4) is stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of gate passage memory=n-1. Store. Therefore, the order in which the normal symbol per determination random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to each gate passing memory number is always the order of gate passing memory number=1, 2, 3, 4 It is supposed to match.

Next, the CPU 56 uses a normal symbol determination table for determining whether or not to make a normal symbol, and performs a lottery process based on a random number (ordinary symbol per determination random number value) to determine whether or not to make a normal symbol. Or not (step S5127). Note that in this embodiment, in step S5127, the CPU 56 uniformly determines whether the state is the probable variation state, the KT state, or the high base state. It is decided to be a normal symbol with probability.

In step S5127, if the read normal symbol hit determination random number value is within the hit range (if hit), the CPU 56 sets the hit symbol as the display result (step S5128), and proceeds to step S5130. Further, in step S5127, if the read random number for normal symbol hit determination is not within the hit range (if it is out), the CPU 56 sets the out symbol as the display result (step S5129) and proceeds to step S5130.

In step S5130, if the high base flag is set, the CPU 56 sets 0.2 seconds as the normal symbol variation time in the normal symbol process timer (Y in step S5130, S5131). Moreover, if the high base flag is not set, that is, if it is the normal state or the second KT state, 1.0 second is set as the normal symbol variation time in the normal symbol process timer (N in step S5130, S5132).

Then, the game control microcomputer 560 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag to a value (specifically, "1") indicating the normal symbol variation process (step S5101) (step S5133).

FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the normal symbol variation process (step S5101). In the normal symbol variation process, the CPU 56 confirms whether the value of the normal symbol process timer has become 0, that is, whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out (step S5141). If the normal symbol process timer has not timed out (N in step S5141), the CPU 56 decrements the value of the normal symbol process timer by -1 (step S5144).

When the normal symbol process timer times out, that is, when the fluctuation time of the normal symbol has elapsed (Y in step S5141), the CPU 56 corresponds to 0.2 seconds as a normal symbol stop symbol display time on the normal symbol process timer. A value is set (step S5142). Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag to a value (specifically “2”) indicating the normal symbol stop process (step S5102) (step S5143).

FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the normal symbol stop processing (step S5102). In the normal symbol stop processing, the CPU 56 decrements the value of the normal symbol process timer by -1 (step S3701). Then, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the value of the normal symbol process timer has become 0, that is, whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out (step S3702). Normally, if the symbol process timer has not timed out (N in step S3702), the process ends as it is.

When the normal symbol process timer times out, that is, when the normal symbol stop symbol display time has elapsed (Y in step S3702), the CPU 56 determines whether or not the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol (hit in step S5127). It is confirmed (whether or not) is determined (step S3703). Whether or not the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol, for example, by setting a normal symbol hit determination flag when it is determined to be a hit in step S5127, it can be confirmed by checking whether or not the flag is set. You can

When it is determined that the stop symbol of the normal symbol is not the hit symbol but the deviating symbol (N in step S3703), the CPU 56 sets the value of the normal symbol process flag to the value indicating the normal symbol normal process (step S5100) ( Specifically, it is updated to "0" (step S3708).

In step S3703, when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol (Y in step S3703), the CPU 56 determines whether or not the high base flag is set (step S3704), and if it is set, That is, in the case of the first KT state, 0.1 seconds is set in the normal symbol process timer as the time before the normal electric accessory release (step S3706). Moreover, when the high base flag is not set, that is, in the normal state or the second KT state, 2.6 seconds is set in the normal symbol process timer as the time before the opening of the normal electric accessory (step S3705). ..

Next, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value (specifically, “3”) corresponding to the normal electric auditors product opening preprocessing (step S5103) (step S3707).

FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the normal electric auditors product opening preprocessing (step S5103). In the normal electric accessory release pre-processing, the CPU 56 decrements the value of the normal symbol process timer by -1 (step S3801). Then, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the value of the normal symbol process timer has become 0, that is, whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out (step S3802). Normally, if the symbol process timer has not timed out (N in step S3802), the process ends as it is.

When the normal symbol process timer times out, that is, when the time before the normal electric auditors product opening elapses (Y in step S3802), the CPU 56 determines whether or not the high base flag is set (step S3803). If it is set, that is, if it is in the first KT state, 5.5 seconds is set in the normal symbol process timer as the normal electric accessory release time (step S625). Moreover, when the high base flag is not set, that is, in the normal state or the second KT state, 0.2 seconds is set to the normal symbol process timer as the normal electric accessory release time (step S624).

As described above, in the present embodiment, the normal electric accessory release time is set to 5.5 seconds in the first KT state, and the normal electric accessory release time is set to 0.2 seconds in the normal state or the second KT state. By doing so, the first KT state is in a state in which it is easier to make a start winning at the second starting winning opening 14 than in the normal state or the second KT state. Therefore, the first KT state is configured so that the game ball does not easily reach the special variable winning ball device 22 provided downstream of the variable winning ball device 15 than the normal state or the second KT state.

It should be noted that the control method for facilitating the starting winning in the second starting winning opening 14 when the gaming state is the first KT state is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, in the case of the first KT state, the variable winning ball device 15 is opened more times than in the case of being in the normal state or the second KT state (for example, in the normal state or the second KT state, the variable winning ball device 15). 15 may be set to 1 as the number of times of opening, whereas in the first KT state, the number of times of opening the variable winning ball device 15 may be set to 2). By doing so, in the first KT state, by increasing the number of times that the variable winning ball device 15 is opened, it is possible to easily make a start winning at the second starting winning opening 14.

Further, for example, in the case of the first KT state, as compared with the case of the normal state or the second KT state, the control for increasing the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 and the variable winning ball device 15 described above. May be executed in combination with the control for increasing the number of times of opening.

Next, the CPU 56 controls the variable winning ball device 15 to the open state (step S3806). Specifically, the solenoid 16 is driven to open the variable winning ball device 15.

Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value (specifically, "4") corresponding to the normal electric auditors product operating process (step S5104) (step S3807).

FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the normal electric auditors product operating process (step S5104). In the normal electric auditors product operating process, the CPU 56 decrements the value of the normal symbol process timer by -1 (step S3901). Then, whether or not the value of the normal symbol process timer has become 0, that is, whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out is checked (step S3902). Normally, if the symbol process timer has not timed out (N in step S3901), the process ends.

In step S3902, when the normal symbol process timer times out (Y in step S3902), the CPU 56 controls the variable winning ball device 15 to the closed state (step S3911). Specifically, the drive of the solenoid 16 is stopped to close the variable winning ball device 15.

Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag to a value (specifically "0") indicating the normal symbol normal process (step S5100) (step S3912).

Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. 41 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the effect control microcomputer 200 (specifically, effect control CPU 201) mounted on the effect control board 80. When the power is turned on, the effect control CPU 201 starts executing main processing. In the main processing, first, initialization processing for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, and initializing a timer for determining the activation interval of the effect control is performed (step S701). After that, the effect control CPU 201 shifts to the loop processing for monitoring the timer interrupt flag (step S702). When the timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 201 sets the timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set in the main process, the effect control CPU 201 clears the flag (step S703) and executes the following effect control process.

In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 201 first analyzes the received effect control command and sets a flag according to the received effect control command (command analysis process: step S704). Next, the effect control CPU 201 performs a first decorative symbol process process (step S705A). In the first decorative pattern process process, a process corresponding to the current control state (first effect control process flag) is selected from among the processes corresponding to the control state, and the display control of the first variable display section 9a is executed. .. Further, the second decorative pattern process processing is performed (step S705B). In the second decorative pattern process process, the process corresponding to the current control state (second effect control process flag) is selected from among the processes corresponding to the control state, and the display control of the second variable display section 9b is executed. .. Further, the background symbol process process for controlling the display state of the background symbol display unit 9c is executed (step S706). Further, the hold storage display control process for controlling the display state of the symbol hold storage display unit 18c is executed (step S707). In addition, a random number updating process for updating the counter value of the counter for generating a random number such as a random number for advance notice determination is executed (step S708). Then, it transfers to step S702.

42 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of a command reception buffer for storing the effect control command received from the game control microcomputer 560 of the main board 31. As shown in FIG. In this example, a ring buffer type command receiving buffer capable of storing six 2-byte effect control commands is used. Therefore, the command receiving buffer is composed of the 12-byte area of the receiving command buffers 1-12. Then, a command reception number counter indicating which area to store the received command is used. The command reception number counter has a value of 0-11. The ring buffer format is not always required.

The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 is received by an interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal and is stored in the buffer area formed in the RAM. In the command analysis process, which command (see FIG. 16 and FIG. 17) is the effect control command stored in the buffer area is analyzed. The interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal is executed prior to the timer interrupt process executed every 4 ms.

43 to 47 are flowcharts showing a specific example of the command analysis process (step S704). The effect control command received from the main board 31 is stored in the received command buffer, but in the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 201 confirms the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 201 first confirms whether or not a received command is stored in the command reception buffer (step S611). Whether it is stored or not is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the received command is stored in the command receiving buffer, the effect control CPU 201 reads the received command from the command receiving buffer (step S612). When read, the value of the read pointer is set to +2 (step S613). The reason for adding +2 is that 2 bytes (1 command) are read.

If the received effect control command is the variation pattern command (step S614), the effect control CPU 201 stores the received variation pattern command in the variation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM (step S615). Then, the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S616).

If the received effect control command is the display result specifying command (step S617), the effect control CPU 201 forms the received display result specifying command (display result 1 specifying command to display result 8 specifying command) in the RAM. The display result designation command storage area is stored (step S618).

If the received effect control command is the symbol confirmation designation command (step S619), the effect control CPU 201 sets the confirmation command reception flag (step S620). The confirmation command reception flag is a flag indicating that the symbol confirmation designation command has been normally received. After that, the effect control CPU 201 executes the process when the confirmation command is received (step S621).

If the received effect control command is the first big hit start designation command or the second big hit start designation command (step S622), the effect control CPU 201 causes the first big hit start designation command reception flag or the second big hit start designation command reception flag. Is set (step S623). In this embodiment, the first big hit start designation command reception flag and the second big hit start designation command reception flag set in step S623 are also referred to as fanfare flags.

After that, the CPU 201 for effect control ends the instruction notification (step S624). The instruction notification is an effect for notifying how to hit the game ball, and the first instruction notification for prompting the player to hit the game ball to the substantially right side of the game area 7 and the hitting of the game ball to the gate 32 as the operation area. A second instruction notification for prompting is provided. As the first instruction notification, the first normal instruction notification that displays an image including the characters "right hit" on the entire surface of the effect display device 9 and "right hit" on a part of the effect display device 9 (upper right part). And a first reduction instruction notification that displays an image including the characters ", and as the second instruction notification, an image including the characters "Aim at the gate" is displayed on the entire surface of the effect display device 9. 2 The normal instruction notification and the second reduction instruction notification that displays an image including the characters “Aim at the gate” are provided in a part (upper right portion) of the effect display device 9.

In the present embodiment, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the first instruction notification is started, and the passage of the game ball to the gate 32 is not detected within 10 seconds after the first instruction notification is started. In this case, the image of the second instruction notification is superimposed on the image of the first instruction notification.

Further, the effect control CPU 201 resets the instruction notification timer for measuring the period from switching the instruction notification from the first instruction notification to the second instruction notification (step S625).

In addition, the effect control CPU 201 performs control to newly start the right-handed display (small) display that prompts the right-handed operation on the effect display device 9 (step S626). In step S626, for example, control is performed to start displaying a small-sized right-handed display at the upper right end of the display screen of the effect display device 9.

If the received effect control command is the big hit end designation command (step S627), the effect control CPU 201 sets the big hit end designation command reception flag (step S628). In this embodiment, the big hit end designation command reception flag set in step S628 is also referred to as an ending flag.

If the received effect control command is the small hit start designation command (step S629), the effect control CPU 201 sets the small hit start designation command reception flag (step S630).

If the received effect control command is the small hit end designation command (step S631), the effect control CPU 201 sets the small hit end designation command reception flag (step S632).

If the received effect control command is the low-accuracy/non-KT background designation (step S633), the effect control CPU 201 sets the background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 to a background screen corresponding to the low-probability/non-KT state (for example, , And the background screen of the blue display color) (step S634). If the right-handed display is displayed on the effect display device 9, the effect control CPU 201 performs control to erase the right-handed display (step S635). Further, the effect control CPU 201, if set, resets the first KT state flag indicating the first KT state (step S636).

If the received production control command is the low accuracy/first KT background designation (step S637), the production control CPU 201 sets the background screen displayed on the production display device 9 to the low probability/background screen corresponding to the first KT state (for example, , And the background screen of the green display color) (step S638). In addition, the effect control CPU 201 performs control to start display of a right-hand hit display (small) that prompts a right-hand hit operation on the effect display device 9 (step S639). In step S639, for example, control is performed to start display of a small-sized right-handed display at the upper right end of the display screen of the effect display device 9. Moreover, the CPU 201 for effect control sets the first KT state flag (step S640). Further, if set, the effect control CPU 201 resets the probability variation state flag indicating the probability variation state and the second KT state flag indicating the second KT state (step S641).

If the received production control command is high-accuracy/first KT background designation (step S642), the production control CPU 201 sets the background screen displayed on the production display device 9 to a background screen corresponding to the high probability/first KT state (for example, , And a yellow display color background screen) (step S643). In addition, the effect control CPU 201 performs control to start display of a right-hand hit display (small) that prompts a right-hand hit operation on the effect display device 9 (step S650). In step S650, for example, control is performed to start display of a small-sized right-handed display at the upper right end of the display screen of the effect display device 9. Further, the effect control CPU 201 sets the probability variation state flag and the first KT state flag (step S651). If the effect control CPU 201 has been set, the second KT state flag is reset (step S652).

When the received production control command is high-accuracy/second KT background designation (step S653), the production control CPU 201 sets the background screen displayed on the production display device 9 to a background screen corresponding to the high probability/second KT state (for example, , And the display screen of red display color) (step S654). In addition, the effect control CPU 201 performs control to start display of a right-handed display (large) that prompts a right-handed operation on the effect display device 9 (step S655). In step S655, for example, a large-sized right-handed display is displayed in the lower center of the display screen of the effect display device 9 (a larger-sized right-handed display compared to the right-handed display displayed in the first KT state or during the big hit game). Performs control to start display. Further, the effect control CPU 201 sets the probability variation state flag and the second KT state flag (step S656). If the effect control CPU 201 is set, the effect control CPU 201 resets the first KT state flag (step S657).

If the received effect control command is the full-tank error notification designation command (step S658), the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the big hit game is currently in progress (step S659). Whether or not the big hit game is currently being performed is, for example, whether or not the value of a background symbol process flag described later is a value of 4 to 7 indicating that it is a big hit display process to a big hit end effect process. It can be determined by doing. If a big hit game is currently being played, the effect control CPU 201 performs control to start displaying a full tank error notification (large) on the effect display device 9 (step S660). In step S660, for example, a large size character display such as "full tank error!" is displayed at the lower left corner of the display screen of the effect display device 9. If the big hit game is not currently in progress, the effect control CPU 201 performs control to start displaying the full tank error notification (small) on the effect display device 9 (step S661). In step S661, a character display such as "full" is displayed in a small size at the lower left corner of the display screen of the effect display device 9, for example.

If the received production control command is the full tank error release designating command (step S662), the production control CPU 201, if the full display error notification is displayed on the production display device 9, a control for deleting the display of the full tank error notification. Is performed (step S663).

If the received effect control command is the special winning opening winning designation command (step S664), the effect control CPU 201 sets the first prize ball number counter and the second prize ball number counter to 15 (one prize to the special winning opening). (Corresponding to the number of prize balls per hit) is added (step S665).

The first prize ball number counter is a counter for counting the number of prize balls in the condominium, and is a big winning hole in the big hit game that triggered the start of the condominium and in all the big hit games that occurred during the condominium. The award ball based on the award ball based on the award ball being awarded to the special award winning hole 24 in all the small hit games that occurred in the award ball based on the award winning of the amusement ball and the probability change state in the condominium, the first KT state and the second KT state. It is added at any time. Further, the second prize ball number counter is a counter for counting the number of prize balls in the second KT state, and the big hit game that triggered the start of the second KT state and all the big hit games that occurred during the second KT state. The prize balls based on the fact that the game balls have won in the special winning opening and the prize balls based on the fact that the gaming balls have won in the special winning opening 24 in all the small hit games that have occurred in the second KT state are added at any time.

Further, if the effect display CPU 9 is displaying an award winning sphere number display indicating the number of award balls in the condominium on the effect display device 9, based on the value of the first prize sphere number counter after addition. If the special rush medium prize ball number display indicating the number of prize balls in the second KT state is being displayed on the effect display device 9 while updating the Renso medium prize ball number display, the second prize ball number counter after addition. The display of the number of balls in the special rush middle prize is updated based on the value of (step S666).

If the received effect control command is the special prize winning award designation command (step S667), the effect control CPU 201 sets the first prize ball number counter and the second prize ball number counter to 10 (1 to the special prize hole 24, respectively). (Corresponding to the number of prize balls per winning) is added (step S668). Moreover, CPU201 for production control will update the number of prize balls in continuous games based on the value of the 1st prize ball number counter after addition, if special number rush is displayed, if the number of prize balls in intermediate games is being displayed. If the middle prize ball number display is being displayed, the special rush middle prize ball number display is updated based on the value of the second prize ball number counter after the addition (step S669).

Next, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the second KT state flag is set (step S670). If the second KT state flag is set (that is, if it is the second KT state), the effect control CPU 201 causes the effect display device 9 to display a prize ball addition display (for example, a character display such as “+10”). (Step S671). Further, the effect control CPU 201 causes the speaker 27 to output a predetermined winning sound (step S672), and causes the special winning opening lamp 24a to be lit and displayed (step S673).

On the other hand, if the second KT state flag is not set (if it is not the second KT state), the process returns to step S611 without executing the processes of steps S671 to S673.

By executing the processing of steps S670 to S673, in this embodiment, the display of the prize ball addition display and the output of the winning sound are based on the fact that the game ball has won in the special winning opening 24 during the second KT state. , And the special winning opening lamp 24a is lit up, and if the game ball is won in the special winning opening 24 but is not in the second KT state, the display of the prize ball addition display, the output of the winning sound, and the special winning The mouth lamp 24a is not illuminated.

It should be noted that it is not always necessary to perform all the display of the prize ball addition display, the output of the winning sound, and the lighting display of the special winning opening lamp 24a, and only one or two of them are executed. You may.

In addition, in this embodiment, based on the receipt of the special winning opening winning award designating command and the special winning opening winning award designating command (based on the occurrence of the winning in the large winning a prize opening or the special winning opening 24), Although the case of updating the display of the number of balls in the award for special prize or the display of the number of balls for a special rush in the special rush is shown, further, based on the reception of the command for designating the normal starting opening winning a prize (the winning to the normal starting winning opening 17 has occurred. Alternatively, the display of the number of balls in the Renjo middle prize or the number of balls in the special rush middle prize may be updated, in this case, for example, based on the reception of the normal start opening prize designation command. 1 is added to each of the first prize ball number counter and the second prize ball number counter, and based on the values of the first prize ball number counter and the second prize ball number counter after the addition, the number of special prize balls in the condominium game and the special prize are displayed. The display of the number of balls in the rush middle prize may be updated.

If the received production control command is the first customer waiting demo display designation command (step S674), the production control CPU 201 sets the first demo command reception flag indicating that the first customer waiting demo display designation command has been received. Yes (step S675). Further, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the first KT state flag or the second KT state flag is set (step S676). If the first KT state flag or the second KT state flag is set (that is, if it is the KT state), the process returns to step S611. If neither the first KT state flag nor the second KT state flag is set (that is, in the non-KT state), the effect control CPU 201 performs the movable member initial operation process for performing the initial operation of the movable member 78. It is executed (step S677).

If the received production control command is the second customer waiting demo display designation command (step S678), the production control CPU 201 sets a second demo command reception flag indicating that the second customer waiting demo display designation command has been received. Yes (step S679). Moreover, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the first KT state flag or the second KT state flag is set (step S680). If neither the first KT state flag nor the second KT state flag is set (that is, in the non-KT state), the process returns to step S611. If the first KT state flag or the second KT state flag is set (that is, if the KT state), the effect control CPU201 executes the movable member initial operation process (step S681).

In this embodiment, the process of steps S674 to S681 is executed, so that the movable member initial operation process is executed in response to the reception of the customer waiting demo display designation command. When the display designation command is received, the movable member initial operation process is executed on condition that it is in the non-KT state, and when the second customer waiting demonstration display designation command is received, it is movable on condition that it is the KT state. The member initial operation process is executed.

In the movable member initial operation processing of steps S677 and S681, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the detection signal from the origin position sensor 78b is input to determine whether or not the movable member 78 is at the origin position. To judge. If the movable member 78 is not at the origin position, the effect control CPU 201 controls the movable member motor 78a so that the movable member 78 moves to the origin position (initial operation).

Even when the movable member 78 is at the origin position, the movable member 78 may be operated to return to the origin position again.

If the initial operation of moving the movable member 78 to the origin position fails, execution of the effect using the movable member 78 is limited (for example, the movable member 78 is used until the power is turned on next time). The effect may not be executed).

If the received production control command is the gate passage 1 designation command (step S682), that is, if the game ball passes through the gate 32 during the non-KT state, the production control CPU 201 is in the big hit game. It is confirmed whether or not (step S683). Whether or not it is a big hit game, for example, the value of the background symbol process flag used in the background symbol process processing described later is a value ("4" to "7") indicating the big hit display processing to the big hit end effect processing. It can be determined by checking whether or not If the big hit game is not in progress, the CPU 201 for effect control displays a left hit display on the effect display device 9 to prompt the player to perform a firing operation (left hit operation) aiming at the left side of the game area 7. Control is performed (step S684). In other words, in this case, even though the game is in the non-KT state and not in the jackpot game state, it is a case where the right-handed operation is performed and the game ball passes through the gate 32. The left-handed display is displayed to prompt.

It should be noted that, in this embodiment, the case where it is determined that the game ball has passed through the gate 32 in the non-KT state based on the reception of the gate passage 1 designation command (see step S682), but KT When configured to send a common gate passage designation command regardless of whether it is in a state, after grasping the game state based on the production control command other than the gate passage designation command, the left-handed display It may be configured to do so. In this case, for example, if the background designation command received before that is the low-accuracy/non-KT background designation command, it is identified as the non-KT state, and if it is any other background designation command, it is identified as the KT state. In the non-KT state and the big hit game state, the left-handed display may be performed based on the reception of the gate passage designation command.

If the received effect control command is any other command, the effect control CPU 201 sets a flag according to the received effect control command or executes processing (step S685). Then, the process proceeds to step S611.

FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the processing upon receipt of the confirmation command. The effect control CPU 201 determines whether or not any one of the display result 2 designation command to the display result 7 designation command is stored in the display result designation command storage area, so that the symbol stopped and displayed is a big hit symbol. It is determined whether or not (step S4401). When any of the display result 2 designation command to the display result 7 designation command is stored in the display result designation command storage area, that is, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the received symbol fixing designation command is the second symbol fixing designation. It is determined whether the command is a command (step S4401A), and if the command is the first symbol confirmation designation command, the process proceeds to step S4404.

If the received symbol confirmation designation command is the second symbol confirmation designation command, the effect control CPU 201 determines whether it is in the normal state (step S4401B), and if it is in the KT state (first KT flag and second KT). If any of the flags are set), the process moves to step S4404.

In the normal state, the effect control CPU 201 determines whether or not the in-preparation displayed flag indicating that the big hit preparation display indicating that the big hit variation is already executed is set (step S4402). If it is set, the in-preparation displayed flag is reset (step S4403) and the process proceeds to step S4404.

In step S4404, the effect control CPU 201 starts the first normal instruction notification (step S4404), and sets a value corresponding to 10 seconds in the instruction notification timer (step S4406).

Further, in step S4402, if the in-preparation displayed flag indicating that the in-preparation display has been executed is not set, the effect control CPU 201 starts the first reduction instruction notification (step S4405), and proceeds to step S4406. To do. The in-preparation display is an effect that is executed when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is started during the big hit fluctuation of the second special symbol in the normal state, and specifically, the character "big hit in preparation" is displayed. It is an effect in which the included image is displayed on the effect display device 9. In addition, in this embodiment, a case is shown in which a still image including the characters "preparing for big hit" is displayed, but not limited to such a mode, for example, a big hit game is started as a "preparing display". It may be configured to perform a display corresponding to the period up to (the remaining variation time of the variation display of the second special symbol).

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the big hit symbol of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed, the first normal instruction notification is performed. Further, when the big hit symbol of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed, if the KT state, the first normal instruction notification is given. Further, when the big hit symbol of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed, the first normal instruction notification is given only when the in-preparation display is being executed in the normal state, and when the in-preparation display is not executed. Performs the first reduction instruction notification.

FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the background symbol process processing (step S706) shown in FIG.
First, the effect control CPU 201 performs instruction notification control processing for performing control related to instruction notification (step S4501), and performs demo display control processing (step S4502) for performing control related to demo display.

After that, the effect control CPU 201 performs any one of steps S900 to S908 according to the value of the background symbol process flag. In each process, the following process is executed.

Background symbol fluctuation start waiting process (step S900): It is determined whether or not the fluctuation start condition of the background symbol is satisfied, and if the fluctuation start condition of the background symbol is satisfied, fluctuation is started in the background symbol display portion 9c. To control. The fluctuation start condition of the background pattern is satisfied when it is confirmed by the command analysis process that any fluctuation pattern command is received. Then, the background symbol process flag is updated to a value according to the background symbol variation start process (step S901).

Background symbol variation start processing (step S901): Control is performed so that variation of the background symbol on the left middle right is started. Further, the stop symbol of the background symbol is determined according to the received display result command, and the variation time of the background symbol is set. Then, the value of the background symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the background symbol changing process (step S902).

Background symbol changing process (step S902): The end of the changing time of the background symbol is monitored. When the variable time ends, the value of the background symbol process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the background symbol stop process (step S903).

Background symbol stop processing (step S903): The control for finally stopping the fluctuation of the background symbol and displaying the stopped symbol is performed. Then, the value of the background symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the background symbol variation start waiting process (step S900), the big hit display process (step S904), or the small hit medium process (step S908). In addition, when updating to a value corresponding to the big hit display process (step S904), the big hit display process (step S904) on condition that the first big hit start designation command or the second big hit start designation command is received. Update to the value corresponding to. In addition, when updating to a value corresponding to the small hit medium processing (step S908), the value corresponding to the small hit medium display processing (step S908) is provided on condition that the small hit start designation command is received. Update.

Big hit display processing (step S904): Big hit display is controlled. Then, when a big winning opening opening display command (a big winning opening opening display command related to the first round) that indicates that the jackpot game has actually started, the value of the background symbol process flag is processed during the round ( The value is updated to the value corresponding to step S905).

Processing during round (step S905): Display control during round is performed. For example, when a special winning opening open display command indicating that the special winning opening is open is received, display control of the number of rounds is performed.

Post-Round Processing (Step S906): Display control between rounds is performed. For example, when a display command after opening the special winning opening indicating that the special winning opening is open (closed) is received, interval display is performed.

Big hit end effect processing (step S907): The big hit end display is controlled after the big hit game ends. For example, when an ending designation command (first ending designation command, second ending designation command) designating the end of the big hit is received, the ending effect is executed. Then, the value of the background symbol process flag is updated to the value of the background symbol process flag to a value according to the background symbol variation start waiting process (step S900).

Processing during small hit (step S908): Display control during small hit game is performed. Then, when the small hit end designation command is received, the value of the background symbol process flag is updated to the value of the background symbol process flag to the value according to the background symbol variation start waiting process (step S900).

FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the instruction notification control process. In the instruction notification control process, the effect control CPU 201 determines whether the first instruction notification is being performed (step S4601), and if the first instruction notification is being performed, the value of the instruction notification timer is decremented by 1 (step S4602). ), it is determined whether the instruction notification timer times out (step S4603). If the time-out has occurred (10 seconds have elapsed since the execution of the first instruction notification), if the first normal instruction notification is being executed, the second normal instruction notification is started (Y in step S3503, S4605). If the 1 reduction instruction notification is being executed, the second reduction display notification is started (step S4506).

As described above, in the present embodiment, the second instruction notification is executed 10 seconds after the first instruction notification is started. In addition, if the first normal instruction notification is being performed, the second normal instruction notification is performed 10 seconds later, and if the first reduction instruction notification is being executed, the second reduction instruction notification is performed 10 seconds later. Becomes

When executing the second instruction notification image, the second instruction notification image may be displayed in a superimposed manner on the first instruction notification image, or the first instruction notification image may be deleted and the second instruction notification image may be displayed. It may be displayed.

51 and 52 are flowcharts showing the demo display control processing. In the demo display control process, the effect control CPU 201 determines whether or not the first demo command reception flag is set (step S4701), and if not set, the process proceeds to step S4706. If it is set, it is determined whether or not it is in the normal state (step S4702), and if it is not the normal state, the process proceeds to step S4705. Specifically, if neither the first KT flag nor the second KT flag is set, it is determined to be in the normal state.

In the normal state, the effect control CPU 201 sets the first demo standby timer for measuring a value corresponding to the time (for example, 30 seconds) until the first demo display is started (step S4703), A first demo standby flag indicating that the first demo display is on standby is set (step S4704). Then, the first demo reception flag is reset (step S4705).

After that, the effect control CPU 201 determines whether or not the first demonstration standby flag is set (step S4706), and if it is set, the first special symbol variation is started (step S4707). Y), or when the big hit game state is controlled based on the variation of the second special symbol (Y in step S4708), the process proceeds to step S4712. As a result, when the first special symbol variation is started or the big hit game state is controlled based on the variation of the second special symbol, the first demo display is not executed. Specifically, in step S4707, when the variation pattern command indicating the variation of the first decorative symbol is received, it is determined that the first special symbol variation is started. Further, in step S4708, when the second big hit start designation command is received, it is determined that the big hit game state is controlled based on the change of the second special symbol.

The first demo standby flag is set, the first special symbol fluctuation is not started (N in step S4707), and if the big hit game state is not controlled based on the fluctuation of the second special symbol (N in step S4708) , The value of the first demo standby timer is decremented by 1 (step S4709), and when the first demo standby timer times out, the first demo display is started (step S4711) and the first demo standby flag is reset ( Step S4712).

After that, if the first demonstration display is being performed (Y in step S4713), the effect control CPU 201 starts changing the first special symbol (Y in step S4714), or based on the change in the second special symbol. If the jackpot gaming state is controlled (Y in step S4715), the first demo display is ended (step S4716).

Further, the effect control CPU 201 determines whether or not the second demo command reception flag is set (step S4801), and if not set, the process proceeds to step S4806. If it is set, it is determined whether or not it is in the KT state (step S4802). If it is not in the KT state, the process proceeds to step S4805. Specifically, if either the first KT flag or the second KT flag is set, it is determined that the KT state is set.

If it is in the KT state, the effect control CPU 201 sets the second demo standby timer for measuring a value corresponding to the time (for example, 30 seconds) until the second demo display is started (step S4803), A second demo standby flag indicating that the second demo display is on standby is set (step S4804). Then, the second demo reception flag is reset (step S4805).

After that, the effect control CPU 201 determines whether or not the second demo standby flag is set (step S4806), and if it is set, the second special symbol variation is started (step S4807). Y) or if it is not in the KT state (N in step S4808), the process moves to step S4812. As a result, when the second special symbol variation starts or the KT state ends, the second demo display is not executed. Specifically, in step S4807, when the fluctuation pattern command indicating the fluctuation of the second decorative symbol is received, it is determined that the second special symbol fluctuation has started. If neither the first KT flag nor the second KT flag is set in step S4808, it is determined that the KT state has ended.

The second demo standby flag is set, the second special symbol variation is not started (N in step S4807), if the KT state is not finished (Y in step S4808), the value of the second demo standby timer Is decremented by 1 (step S4809), and when the second demo standby timer times out, the second demo display is started (step S4811) and the second demo standby flag is reset (step S4812).

After that, the effect control CPU 201, when the second demo display is in progress (Y in step S4813), the variation of the second special symbol is started (Y in step S4814), or when the KT state ends (step). (N in S4815), the second demo display is ended (step S4816).

FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the background symbol variation start waiting process (step S900). In the background pattern variation start waiting process, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S811). If the variation pattern command reception flag is set, the variation pattern command reception flag is reset (step S812).

Next, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether the first KT state flag or the second KT state flag is set (step S813). If neither the first KT state flag nor the second KT state flag is set (that is, if it is a non-KT state), the effect control CPU 201 determines whether or not to execute the variable display of the first special symbol. Is confirmed (step S814). Whether or not the variation display of the first special symbol is executed is, for example, whether or not the variation pattern indicated by the received variation pattern command specifies the first variation patterns #01 to #07. It can be determined by confirming that. Unless the variable display of the first special symbol is executed (that is, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed), the process is ended as it is. When performing the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU201 updates the value of the background symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the background symbol variation start process (step S901) (step S816).

If the 1st KT state flag or the 2nd KT state flag is not set (that is, if it is the KT state), the CPU 201 for effect control confirms whether or not it is the time to execute the variable display of the second special symbol. (Step S815). Whether or not the variation display of the second special symbol is executed is, for example, whether or not the variation pattern indicated by the received variation pattern command specifies the second variation patterns #01 to #32. It can be determined by confirming that. Unless the variable display of the second special symbol is executed (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed), the process is ended. If the variable display of the second special symbol is to be executed, the effect control CPU 201 updates the value of the background symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the background symbol variation start process (step S901) (step S816).

By performing the processing of steps S813 to S816, in this embodiment, in the non-KT state, the variable display of the background symbol is displayed on the effect display device 9 in correspondence with the variable display of the first special symbol. Is executed, in the KT state, the variable display of the background symbol is executed in the effect display device 9 in correspondence with the variable display of the second special symbol. In other words, even if the variable display of the first special symbol is in the KT state, or if the variable display of the second special symbol is performed, it is in the non-KT state. , The variable display of the background pattern is not executed.

FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the background symbol variation start processing (step S901). In the background symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 201 determines a stop symbol of the background symbol (step S920). In this embodiment, when the display result 1 designation command is received (when it is determined to be out), only the left out pattern or the left and right background patterns in which the left, middle, and right background designs are completely inconsistent are matched. Determine the combination of out-of-reach patterns. When the display result 2 designation command is received (when it is determined to be the 16R probability variation big hit), the combination of symbols in which the background symbols on the left, middle and right sides are arranged in odd symbols is determined. In addition, when the display result 3 designation command, the display result 4 designation command, and the display result 6 designation command are received (when it is determined that the 9R probability variation jackpot or the 6R probability variation jackpot and the 2R probability variation jackpot), the left middle right background The combination of symbols in which the symbols are even numbers is determined. Further, when the display result 5 designation command or the display result 7 designation command is received (when it is determined to be a 6R normal big hit or a 2R normal big hit), the same combination as the out-of-reach pattern in which only the left and right background designs match To decide. When the display result 8 designation command is received (when it is determined to be a small hit), a combination of background symbols of the small hit symbol (for example, “135”) is determined.

Next, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the second KT state flag is set (step S921). If the 2nd KT state flag is set (that is, if it is the 2nd KT state), the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the variation display to be started this time is the variation display with reach (step S922). .. Whether or not the fluctuation display is accompanied by the reach can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the fluctuation pattern designated by the received fluctuation pattern command includes the reach. If it is a variable display with reach, the process proceeds to step S924. If it is not the variable display accompanied by the reach, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the variable display to be started this time is the variable display which is a small hit (step S923). Whether the variable display is a small hit or not can be determined, for example, by checking whether the received display result designation command is the display result 8 designation command. If it is not a variation display that is a small hit, the process proceeds to step S924. On the other hand, if the variation display is a small hit, the process directly proceeds to step S930.

When it is the variable display accompanied by the reach (Y of step S922) or when it is not the variable display of the small hit (N of step S923), the effect control CPU 201 is displayed on the effect display device 9. Control is performed to change the right-handed display (large) to the right-handed display (small) (step S924). In step S924, for example, control is performed to change the large-sized right-handed display displayed in the lower center of the display screen of the effect display device 9 to the small-sized right-handed display. Then, the process proceeds to step S930.

Next, the effect control CPU 201 selects a process table corresponding to the variation pattern of the background pattern to be used, in accordance with the variation pattern indicated by the received variation pattern command (step S930). Then, the process timer set value of the process data 1 in the process table selected in step S930 is set in the process timer to start the process timer (step S931). Next, the effect control CPU 201 executes control of the effect device (effect display device 9, various lamps, speaker 27) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). Yes (step S932). For example, a control signal (display control execution data) is output to the VDP 209 in order to display an image according to the variation pattern on the background pattern display unit 9c. In addition, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp driver board 35 in order to control the turning on/off of various lamps. Further, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound output board 70 in order to output sound from the speaker 27.

Next, the effect control CPU 201 sets the value corresponding to the variation time in the background symbol variation time timer to start the background symbol variation time timer (step S933). Then, the background symbol process flag is updated to a value according to the background symbol changing process (step S902) (step S934).

FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the background symbol changing process (step S902) in the background symbol process process. In the background symbol changing process, the effect control CPU 201 first subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step S940), and also subtracts 1 from the value of the normal symbol variation time timer (step S941). When the process timer times out (step S942), the process data is switched. That is, the process timer set value set next in the process table is set in the process timer (step S943). Further, the control state for the effect device is changed based on the display control execution data, the lamp control execution data and the sound number data set next (step S944).

Next, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not it is the display start timing of the award winning sphere number display during the variable display of the background pattern (step S945). In addition, whether or not it is the display start timing of the number of balls in the continuous prize prize can be determined, for example, by checking the value of the background symbol variation time timer set in step S933 of the background symbol variation start process. If it is the display start timing of the number of consecutive prize balls display, the effect control CPU 201 causes the effect display device 9 to display the number of intermediate prize balls based on the current value of the first prize number counter. It is displayed (step S946). In this embodiment, the special rush middle prize ball number display is displayed when in the second KT state (see step S9010 described later), but the condominium middle prize ball in the second KT state is displayed. When the display timing of the number display is reached, the process in step S946 is executed, so that the number of consecutive prize balls is displayed in addition to the special rush middle prize number display.

Next, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the second KT state has ended (step S947). Note that whether or not the second KT state has ended can be determined by, for example, checking the state of the second KT state flag. If the second KT state has ended, the effect control CPU 201 ends the sound output of the second KT music from the speaker 27 (step S948). That is, in this embodiment, when controlled to the second KT state, the sound output of the music for the second KT is started at the start of the big hit game based on the 16R certainty variation big hit which is the trigger (step described later). However, the sound output of the music for the second KT is ended by executing the process of step S948.

Next, the effect control CPU 201 erases the number-of-prize-in-commemoration prize balls display and the special rush-in-prize ball display on the effect display device 9 (step S949). Further, in this embodiment, the character display such as "during special rush" is displayed in the second KT state, but in step S949, the character display such as "during special rush" is also deleted.

Next, in the normal state, the effect control CPU 201 is in a big hit variation of the second special symbol, and when the variation of the first special symbol is started (Y in step S950, Y in S951, Y in S952), the big hit. The in-preparation display is executed (step S953), and the in-preparation displayed flag is set (step S954). In step S950, if neither the first KT state flag nor the second KT state flag is set, it is determined to be the normal state. In step S951, the second decorative design process process (step S705B) is performed while the second decorative design is changing, and the display result 2 designating command, display result 3 designating command, and display result 6 for the second decorative design are displayed. If any of the designated command and the display result 7 designated command is stored, it is determined that the big hit of the second special symbol is changing. In step S952, it is determined that the variation of the first special symbol is started when the variation pattern command for the first special symbol is received.

As described above, when the variation of the first special symbol is started when the jackpot variation of the second special symbol is performed in the normal state, the variation of the first special symbol is forced to be out of alignment, but that At this time, the game control microcomputer 560 may transmit a forced disengagement designation command indicating that the fluctuation of the first special symbol is forced disengagement to the effect control microcomputer 200, and in that case, the effect control The microcomputer for use 200 may execute the big hit preparing display based on the reception of the forced out-of-order designation command. Alternatively, only when the variable display result is determined to be forced out, the game control microcomputer 560 determines a special variation pattern in which the variable display result is not determined other than forced out, and a variation pattern indicating this special variation pattern. Even if a command is transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 to the effect control microcomputer 200, and the effect control microcomputer 200 executes the jackpot preparation display based on the reception of the variation pattern command. Good.

And CPU201 for production control, if the background symbol variation time timer has timed out (step S955), updates the value of the background symbol process flag to a value according to the background symbol variation stop process (step S903) (step S956). ).

56 and 57 are flowcharts showing the background symbol variation stop process (step S903) in the background symbol process process. In the background symbol variation stop process, the effect control CPU 201 first confirms whether or not the stop symbol display flag 1 indicating that the big hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the background symbol is set (step S970A). .. If the stop symbol display flag 1 is set, the process proceeds to step S974. In this embodiment, when the big hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the background symbol, the stop symbol display flag 1 is set in step S973. Then, the stop symbol display flag 1 is reset when the fanfare effect is executed. Therefore, the fact that the stop symbol display flag 1 is set means that the jackpot symbol has been confirmed and displayed, but the fanfare production has not yet been executed, so the process of displaying the stop symbol of the background symbol in step S971 is executed. Without doing so, the process proceeds to step S974.

If the stop symbol display flag 1 is not set, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the stop symbol display flag 2 indicating that the small hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the background symbol is set. (Step S970B). If the stop symbol display flag 2 is set, it moves to step S989. In this embodiment, when the small hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the background symbol, the stop symbol display flag 2 is set in step S988. Then, the stop symbol display flag 2 is reset when executing the effect during the small hit game. Therefore, the fact that the stop symbol display flag 2 is set means that the small hit symbol has been fixedly displayed but the effect during the small hit game is not yet executed, so the stop symbol of the background symbol in step S971 is set. The process proceeds to step S989 without executing the displaying process.

If neither the stop symbol display flag 1 nor the stop symbol display flag 2 is set, the production control CPU 201 stops the stop symbol of the left middle right background symbol (stopping symbol, big hit symbol) in the stop display on the production display device 9. , Small hit symbol) is confirmed and displayed (step S971).

When the big hit symbol is confirmed and displayed in the process of step S971 (Y in step S972), the effect control CPU 201 sets the stop symbol display flag 1 (step S973).

Next, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not any of the jackpot start designation command reception flags (the first jackpot start designation command reception flag and the second jackpot start designation command reception flag) are set (step S974). .. When either big hit start designation command reception flag is set, production control CPU201 resets stop design indicator flag 1 (step S975). The effect control CPU 201 also resets the jackpot start designation command reception flag that has been set.

Next, the effect control CPU 201 selects a process table according to the fanfare effect (step S976). Next, the effect control CPU 201 starts the process timer by setting the process timer setting value to the process timer (step S977), and the content of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number). According to the data 1), the control of the effect device (effect display device 9 as effect parts, various lamps as effect parts, and speaker 27 as effect parts) is executed (step S978).

Next, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether the probability variation state flag, the first KT state flag, or the second KT state flag is set (step S979). If none of the probability variation state flag, the first KT state flag, and the second KT state flag is set (that is, in the low probability/non-KT state), the effect control CPU 201 resets the first prize ball number counter. Yes (step S980). That is, this is a case where a big hit occurs in the low probability/non-KT state, and therefore a so-called initial hit occurs, and the first prize ball number counter is reset.

Next, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the big hit this time is based on the 16R probability variation big hit (step S981). Whether or not the 16R certainty variation jackpot is determined can be determined by, for example, checking whether or not a display result designation command (display result 2 designation command) designating the 16R certainty variation jackpot is received. In the case of 16R probability variation big hit, since the big hit game that triggers the start of the second KT state is started, the effect control CPU 201 controls to start the sound output of the music for the second KT from the speaker 27 ( Step S982).

On the other hand, if the 16R probability variation big hit is not hit, the effect control CPU 201 resets the second prize ball number counter if set (step S983). In other words, in this case, when the second KT state is in effect, a big hit other than the 16R probability variation big hit occurs and the second KT state ends, so the second prize ball number counter is reset.

After that, the effect control CPU 201 updates the value of the background pattern process flag to a value according to the big hit display process (step S904) (step S985).

If the big hit symbol is not definitely displayed in the process of step S971 (N in step S972), if the small hit symbol is definitely displayed in the process of step S971 (Y in step S987), the effect control CPU 201 stops. The symbol display flag 2 is set (step S988).

Next, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the small hit start designation command reception flag is set (step S989). When the small hit start designation command reception flag is set (that is, when the small hit start designation command is received), the effect control CPU 201 resets the stop symbol display flag 2 (step S990). The effect control CPU 201 also resets the small hitting start designation command reception flag that has been set.

Next, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the second KT state flag is set (step S991). If the second KT state flag is set (that is, in the second KT state), the effect control CPU201 selects a process table according to the effect during the small hit (step S992). Next, the effect control CPU 201 starts the process timer by setting the process timer setting value to the process timer (step S993), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number). According to the data 1), control of the effect device (effect display device 9 as effect part, various lamps as effect part, and speaker 27 as effect part) is executed (step S994).

Moreover, the CPU 201 for effect control outputs a predetermined opening sound corresponding to the opening of the special variable winning ball device 22 from the speaker 27 (step S995), and causes the special winning opening lamp 24a to be lit and displayed (step S996).

On the other hand, if the second KT state flag is not set (that is, not in the second KT state), the process proceeds to step S997 without executing the processes of steps S992 to S996. By performing the determination process of step S991, in this embodiment, only when the small hit game is performed during the second KT state, the effect during the small hit game is executed, and the special variable winning ball device 22 is operated. A predetermined opening sound corresponding to the opening is output, and the special winning opening lamp 24a is lit and displayed.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a small hit occurs during the second KT state, a predetermined opening sound is output and the special winning opening lamp 24a is lit and displayed. However, only such a mode is possible. I can't. For example, only one of the output of a predetermined opening sound and the lighting display of the special winning opening lamp 24a may be executed. Further, for example, even during the second KT state, it may be configured such that neither the output of these predetermined opening sounds nor the lighting display of the special winning opening lamp 24a is executed, and in the first place, the effect during the small hitting game is produced. Alternatively, it may be configured such that the processing itself during the small hit is not executed.

Then, the effect control CPU 201 updates the value of the background symbol process flag to a value according to the small hitting process (step S908) (step S997).

When the big hit symbol and the small hit symbol are not displayed in the process of step S971 (that is, when the outlying symbol is displayed) (N in step S972 and N in step S987), the effect control CPU 201 causes the second KT. It is confirmed whether or not the status flag is set (step S998A). If the second KT state flag is set (that is, if it is the second KT state), the effect control CPU 201 determines that the right-handed display displayed on the effect display device 9 is the right-handed display (small). Control for changing the right-handed display (small) to the right-handed display (large) is performed (step S998B). In step S998B, for example, control is performed to change the small-sized right-handed display displayed in the lower center of the display screen of the effect display device 9 to the large-sized right-handed display. Then, the effect control CPU 201 updates the value of the background symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the background symbol variation start waiting process (step S900) (step S999).

FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the big hit ending effect process (step S907) in the background symbol process process. In the big hit end effect processing, the effect control CPU 201 first subtracts 1 from the value of the effect period measurement timer (step S9000). The production period measurement timer is set based on the fact that all rounds of the big hit game have been completed in the post-round processing (see step S906). Next, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the effect period measurement timer has timed out (step S9001).

When the effect period measurement timer has not timed out (N in step S9001), the effect control CPU 201 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step S9002), and the effect device (effect display device 9) according to the content of the process data n. , Speaker 27, etc.) is executed (step S9003). For example, an effect of displaying that the jackpot is over or displaying a predetermined character is executed.

Then, the effect control CPU 201 checks whether the process timer has timed out (step S9004), and if the process timer has timed out, the process data is switched (step S9005). Then, the process timer set value in the next process data is set in the process timer to start the process timer (step S9006).

If the production period measurement timer has timed out (Y in step S9001), the production control CPU 201 determines whether or not the jackpot game to be finished this time is based on the 9R certainty variation jackpot, the 6R certainty variation jackpot, or the 2R certainty variation jackpot. Confirm (step S9007). Whether or not it is the 9R certainty variation jackpot or the 6R certainty variation jackpot is determined by, for example, a display result designation command (display result 3 designation command) designating the 9R certainty variation jackpot or a display result designation command (display result (4 designation command), it can be determined by checking whether or not a display result designation command (display result 6 designation command) that designates the 2R probability variation big hit is received. If it is 9R certainty variation big hit, 6R certainty variation big hit or 2R certainty variation big hit (that is, if high probability state/first KT state is reached after the big hit game ends), the effect control CPU 201 displays an effect if it is not displayed. In the device 9, control for starting the display of the number of prize balls in consecutive games is performed based on the first prize ball number counter (step S9008). In step S9008, the effect control CPU 201 controls the effect display device 9 to start displaying a character display such as "normal rush".

If none of the 9R certainty variation jackpot, the 6R certainty variation jackpot and the 2R certainty variation jackpot, the effect control CPU 201 checks whether or not the jackpot game to be finished this time is based on the 16R certainty variation jackpot (step S9009). Whether or not the 16R certainty variation jackpot is determined can be determined by, for example, checking whether or not a display result designation command (display result 2 designation command) designating the 16R certainty variation jackpot is received. If it is 16R probability variation big hit (that is, if it becomes a high probability state/second KT state after the big hit game ends), the effect control CPU 201, if not displayed, in the effect display device 9, the second prize ball. Based on the number counter, control for starting the display of the number of balls during special rush is performed (step S9010). In step S9010, the effect control CPU 201 performs control to start displaying a character display such as "during special rush" on the effect display device 9.

Although not shown in FIG. 58, if the big hit game to be finished this time is based on the 6R normal big hit or the 2R normal big hit (that is, if the low probability state/first KT state is reached after the big hit game is finished). If so, the effect control CPU 201 performs control to start display of character display such as “chance time” on the effect display device 9.

Even when a character display such as "chance time" is displayed under the control of the low probability state/first KT state, for example, based on the first prize number counter, the number of consecutive prize balls is displayed. It may be configured to display.

Then, the effect control CPU 201 updates the value of the background symbol process flag to a value according to the background symbol variation start waiting process (step S900) (step S9014).

FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing a small hitting process (step S908) in the background symbol process process. In the processing during the small hit, the effect control CPU 201 first confirms whether or not the small hit end designation command reception flag is set (step S9201). When the small hit end designation command reception flag is not set (that is, when the small hit end designation command has not been received yet), the effect control CPU 201 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step S9202). A process for controlling the effect device (effect display device 9, speaker 27, etc.) is executed according to the content of the process data n (step S9203). That is, the effect corresponding to the small hit game is continuously performed.

However, as described above, in the present embodiment, when the second KT state is not in effect, the process table corresponding to the effect during the small hit is not set in the first place (see step S991), so the small hit end designation command is received. Even if not, the effect corresponding to the small hit game is not executed.

Then, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the process timer has timed out (step S9204), and if the process timer has timed out, switches the process data (step S9205). Then, the process timer set value in the next process data is set in the process timer and the process timer is started (step S9206).

When the small hit end designation command reception flag is set (that is, when the small hit end designation command is received), the effect control CPU 201 ends the effect corresponding to the small hit game, and step S9207. Move to. Then, the effect control CPU 201 updates the value of the background symbol process flag to a value according to the background symbol variation start waiting process (step S900) (step S9207).

Next, a display example of right-handed display in the high probability/second KT state will be described. FIG. 60 is an explanatory diagram for describing a display example of right-handed display in the high probability/second KT state. In addition, in FIG. 60, the display screen transitions in the order of (A), (B), and (C).

When the high probability/second KT state is controlled, the right-handed display (large) 309 is displayed on the effect display device 9 (see step S655). In the example shown in FIG. 60(A), as the right-handed display (large) 309, a large-sized character display of “right-handed!” is displayed in the lower center of the display screen of the effect display device 9. There is.

Next, when a variable display with reach or a variable display that does not result in a small hit is executed in the high probability/second KT state, as shown in FIG. The hit display (large) 309 is changed to the right display (small) 310. In the example shown in FIG. 60(B), a case where the large-sized “right-handed!” character display is changed to the small-sized “right-handed!” character display is shown.

Then, when the variable display is terminated and the background symbol is stopped and displayed as a stop symbol, as shown in FIG. 60C, the right-handed display (small) displayed on the effect display device 9 is displayed. 310 is changed to the right-handed display (large) 309 again. In the example shown in FIG. 60C, a case is displayed in which the small-sized “right-handed!” character display is changed to the large-sized “right-handed!” character display.

In addition, in FIG. 60, the display example of the right hit display in the high probability/second KT state is shown. , Right-handed display (small) is displayed (see steps S626, S639, and S650).

Next, a display example of the full tank error notification will be described. FIG. 61 is an explanatory diagram for describing a display example of a full tank error notification. When the detection signal from the full tank switch 48 is input and the full tank error is detected, if the big hit game is currently being performed, the full tank error notification (large) 313 is displayed on the effect display device 9 as shown in FIG. 61(A). Is displayed (see step S660), and is not currently in the big hit game (if not in the big hit game, whether in the KT state or in the non-KT state), as shown in FIG. 61(B). The full display error notification (small) 314 is displayed on the effect display device 9 (see step S661). For example, in the example shown in FIG. 61(A), a predetermined character 311 is displayed based on the fact that a big hit game is being performed, and a character display 312 such as "Big hit!" is displayed as a line of the character 311. As the full tank error notification (large) 313, a case where a large-sized character display such as “full tank error!” is displayed at the lower left corner of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is shown. In the example shown in FIG. 61(B), as the full tank error notification (small) 314, a small-sized character display such as “full tank” may be displayed at the lower left corner of the display screen of the effect display device 9. It is shown.

62 and 63 are explanatory views showing a display example of the instruction notification in the present embodiment. In the display example shown in FIG. 62, a display example of the instruction notification in the case of a big hit based on the variation of the first special symbol is shown. For example, first, as shown in FIG. 62(1), the background design corresponding to the first decorative design is variably displayed, and as shown in FIG. 62(2), the background design is stopped and displayed as a jackpot design. Next, as shown in FIG. 62(3), the first normal instruction notification 55A is given. The first normal instruction notification 55A at this time is performed by displaying an image including the characters "right hit" and the right arrow. Then, when 10 seconds elapse without the game ball passing through the gate 32, the second normal instruction notification 55B is given as shown in FIG. 62(4).

The second normal instruction notification 55B at this time is the text "Aim at the gate" and an image showing the game ball passing through the gate 32 (the square area where the game ball is passing indicates the gate 32). Is displayed.

The display example shown in FIG. 63 shows a display example of the instruction notification in the case of a big hit based on the variation of the second special symbol in the normal state. For example, as shown in FIG. 63(1), the first demo display is displayed because the first special symbol is not changed even in the normal state, and the big hit variation of the second decorative symbol is also performed. Is being done. Then, when the variation of the first special symbol is started, as shown in FIG. 63(2), the big hit preparing display is performed and the preparing display completed flag is set, and then, in FIG. 63(3). As shown, the variation of the second special symbol ends with the big hit symbol. At this time, since the in-preparation displayed flag is set, the first normal instruction notification 56A is performed as shown in FIG. 63(4), and if 10 seconds elapse without the game ball passing through the gate 32, , The second normal instruction notification 56B is performed as shown in FIG. 63(5). At this time, the first normal instruction notification 56A and the second normal instruction notification 56B may be separately displayed in parallel, or only the second normal instruction notification 56B may be displayed without displaying the first normal instruction notification 56A. You may.

The first normal instruction notification 56A at this time is performed by displaying an image that includes the characters "right hit" and the right arrow, and the second normal instruction notification 56B includes the characters "aim at the gate" and the gate. It is performed by displaying an image showing a game ball passing through 32 (the rectangular area where the game ball passes through shows the gate 32).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 63(6), when the variation of the second special symbol is completed in the jackpot symbol without the variation of the first special symbol being performed, the first reduction as shown in FIG. 63(7). When the instruction notification 56C is performed and 10 seconds elapse without the game ball passing through the gate 32, the second reduction instruction notification 56D is performed as shown in FIG. 63(8).

The first reduction instruction notification 56C at this time is performed by displaying only the image showing the character "right stroke". Further, the second reduction instruction notification 56D is performed by displaying only the image showing the characters "aiming at the gate".

Thus, in the present embodiment, when the big hit variation of the second special symbol is performed in the normal state, when the variation of the first special symbol is performed, the big hit preparation display is performed, and the variation of the first special symbol is performed. When is not performed, the execution of the big hit preparing display is restricted (not executed).

Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, when the big hit variation of the second special symbol is performed in the normal state, when the variation of the first special symbol is performed, the first normal instruction notification and the second normal instruction notification When the variation of the first special symbol is not performed, the first reduction instruction notification and the second reduction instruction notification having lower visibility than the first normal instruction notification and the second normal instruction notification are performed.

FIG. 64 is a timing chart when the big hit game state ends and the state is controlled to the first KT state. The timing chart shown in FIG. 64 is the presence/absence of control of a big hit game state, the presence/absence of a high base flag and a KT flag, the presence/absence of execution of a normal symbol variation, the presence/absence of opening of the variable winning ball device 15, the second special symbol. The presence/absence of fluctuation and the presence/absence of opening of the special variable winning ball device 22 are shown for each timing.

For example, while being controlled in the big hit game state (before the timing T0 in FIG. 64), 1.0 seconds is the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, 0.2 seconds is the fluctuation stop time of the normal symbol, and the normal symbol is hit. In this case, the time before opening the variable winning ball device 15 is set to 2.6 seconds, and the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 is set to 0.2 seconds. At this time, the closing period of the variable winning ball device 15 while being controlled to the big hit game state is 1.0 seconds which is the variation time of the normal symbol, and 0.2 seconds which is the symbol fixing period of the ordinary symbol, This is 3.8 seconds, which is the sum of 2.6 seconds which is the time before the variable winning ball device 15 is opened. It should be noted that, while being controlled in the big hit game state, the change of the special symbol and the opening control of the special variable winning ball device 22 are not performed.

Further, while being controlled to the first KT state (after timing T0 in FIG. 64), 0.2 seconds as the variation time of the normal symbol, 0.2 seconds as the variation stop time of the ordinary symbol, the normal symbol hits. In this case, 0.1 seconds is set as the time before the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is opened, and 5.5 seconds is set as the opening time of the variable winning ball apparatus 15. At this time, the closing period of the variable winning ball device 15 while being controlled to the big hit game state is 0.2 seconds which is the variation time of the normal symbol and 0.2 seconds which is the symbol fixing period of the ordinary symbol, It is 0.5 seconds, which is the sum of 0.1 seconds which is the time before the variable winning ball device 15 is opened. In addition, after being controlled to the 1st KT state, 7.0 seconds is the variation time of the second special symbol for the first time, and 0.8 seconds is the opening time of the special variable winning ball device 22 at the time of a small hit, the 1st KT state. After being controlled to, the second special symbol variation time after the second time is set to 1.0 second (assuming that the second reserved memory number is ≧1).

At this time, than the closing period (3.8 seconds) of the variable winning ball device 15 while being controlled to the big hit game state, the variation time of the second special symbol for the first time after being controlled to the first KT state (7 (0.0 seconds) is longer. This is because, for example, when the waiting before the opening of the variable winning ball device 15 is started immediately before the timing T0, it is assumed that the variable winning ball device 15 is closed for 2.6 seconds at the maximum. If the variation time of the second special symbol for the first time after being controlled to the first KT state is too short, the special variable winning ball device 22 is controlled to be open while the variable winning ball device 15 is closed, It is conceivable that a game ball wins in the special variable winning ball device 22 even in the first KT state. Therefore, the variation time of the second special symbol is lengthened so that the special variable winning ball device 22 is not controlled to be opened while the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to be closed.

As described above, according to this embodiment, the effect is controlled based on the information from the game control means (in this example, the game control microcomputer 560) that controls the progress of the game, and the information from the game control means. Effect control means (in this example, the effect control microcomputer 200). Further, the game control means, in a predetermined state (in this example, a gate passage waiting state) after a predetermined condition (in this example, the big hit symbol was derived and displayed) is satisfied, a specific region (gate 32 in this example). Based on the passage of the game medium (the game ball in this example), it is possible to control to an advantageous state advantageous to the player (in this example, the big hit game state). Further, the game control means can execute a variable display of the ordinary identification information (in this example, an ordinary symbol) based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the specific area, and the display result of the variable display of the ordinary identification information is Based on the predetermined display result (the winning symbol in this example), the variable device (variable winning ball device 15 in this example) is controlled to the easy entry state (open state in this example). Further, the game control means, regardless of whether it is in a predetermined state, common specific passage information (in this example, a gate passage 1 designation command, a gate passage 2 designation) based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the specific region. Command) is output. Therefore, since the information is shared, the program capacity of the game control means can be reduced and the information can be output appropriately.

In addition, in this embodiment, the gate 32 is commonly used in both the starting region and the operating region, and the gate switch 32a is also used as a common switch. However, when the game ball passes through the gate 32, When the predetermined passage flag is initially set, the common passage flag may be set regardless of whether the gate is in the waiting state or the gate is in the waiting state. It may be configured to set different passage flags depending on whether or not.

Further, in this embodiment, the case where only one dual-purpose gate 32 is provided is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, in addition to the gate 32 that is commonly used as the normal starting region and the operating region, a gate that does not serve as the operating gate (that only serves as the normal starting region) may be provided.

Further, for example, a lamp or an LED may be provided near the gate 32, and the lamp or the LED near the gate 32 may be turned on or blinked only when the gate is waiting to pass.

Further, for example, while the gate 32 is in a waiting state and the gate 32 is functioning as an operation area is informed on the effect display device 9, the gate 32 is effective as an ordinary starting area (the number of normally reserved memories is 3 or less). When the time is), the effect display device 9 may not be notified. On the contrary, when the gate 32 is effective as a normal starting area, the effect display device 9 may be informed.

Further, according to this embodiment, the effect control means can execute the effect corresponding to the variable display of the normal identification information (in this example, the left-handed display is displayed) based on the input of the specific passage information. Is. Therefore, the effect corresponding to the variable display of the normal identification information can be appropriately executed.

It should be noted that in this embodiment, the case where the left-handed display is displayed is shown as the "effect corresponding to the variable display of the ordinary identification information", but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, in a gaming machine configured to be able to variably display a fourth symbol and a small symbol corresponding to a variable display of a normal symbol, based on the reception of a gate passage designation command, a variable display of the fourth symbol and a small symbol is executed. It may be configured to. In addition, for example, in a mode of performing roulette display, whether the reach effect is executed in the variable display of the special symbol or the effect symbol, or whether the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to the open state is notified. The gaming machine configured to be capable of executing the predetermined effect may be configured to execute the predetermined effect based on the reception of the gate passage designation command. In this way, various production modes are conceivable as the "production corresponding to the variable display of the ordinary identification information".

Further, according to this embodiment, the game control means makes the first identification based on the fact that the game medium (the game ball in this example) has passed through the starting region (the first start winning opening 13 in this example). The variable display of the information (the first special symbol in this example) is executed, and the second identification information (in this example, based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the variable device (variable winning ball device 15 in this example)). Variable display of the second special symbol) is executed. Further, the game control means can control to a special state advantageous to the player different from the advantageous state (in this example, a small hitting game state), and a special state in which the frequency is controlled to the special state (this example) Then, the KT state can be controlled. The starting area is provided in the first path (in this example, to the left of the game area 7) of the downflow path through which the game medium flows down, and the specific area (in this example, the gate 32) and the variable device are in the downflow area. It is provided on a second route (right side of the game area 7 in this example) different from the first route among the routes. Then, the effect control means, if not controlled to the advantageous state (in this example, the big hit game state) and not controlled to the special state, based on the input of the specific passage information, to the first route. It is possible to execute the promotion notification (display in the left-handed display in this example) for promoting the emission of the game medium. Therefore, the promotion notification can be appropriately executed.

Further, according to this embodiment, the game control means is based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the specific area when not being controlled to the special state, and the first specific passage information (gate passage 1 in this example). The second specific passage information (gate passage 2 in this example) different from the first specific passage information based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the specific area when the special command is output and the special state is controlled. Output the specified command). Then, the effect control means can execute the promotion notification based on the input of the first specific passage information when the control is not performed in the advantageous state. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately execute the promotion notification and reduce the processing load on the effect control unit.

In this embodiment, the case where the gate passage 1 designation command or the gate passage 2 designation command is transmitted depending on whether or not it is in the KT state is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, different gate passage designation commands may be transmitted depending on whether or not the vehicle is in the high base state.

Further, according to this embodiment, the game control means is based on the fact that the game medium (the game ball in this example) has passed through a special area (in this example, the normal starting winning opening 17) different from the specific area. Thus, the variable display of the ordinary identification information (ordinary symbol in this example) can be executed. Further, the game control means executes different information output processing depending on whether the game medium passes through the specific area or when the game medium passes through the special area (in this example, when the game ball wins the gate 32). To the gate passage 1 designation command or the gate passage 2 designation command, and when the game ball is won in the normal start winning opening 17, the normal start opening winning designation command is sent). Therefore, since different information output processing is executed depending on the area through which the game medium has passed, the state can be appropriately notified to the effect control means.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the game ball is won in the normal start winning opening 17, the normal starting opening winning designating command different from the gate passage designating command is transmitted, but in such a mode I can't stop. For example, when a game ball wins the normal start winning opening 17, no command may be transmitted. As such, different information output processing may be executed in some form depending on whether the game ball has passed through the gate 32 or when the game ball has won the normal start winning hole 17.

In addition, in this embodiment, the normal start winning port 17 is provided on the downstream side of the gate 32, but the normal starting winning port 17 is further downstream with respect to the variable winning ball device 15. May be provided. According to such a configuration, the game control means controls the special variable device (special variable winning ball device 20 in this example) to the easy entry state (open state in this example) in the advantageous state. The special area is provided on the downstream side of the specific area (gate 32 in this example) and the variable device (variable winning ball device 15 in this example) and on the upstream side of the special variable device. Therefore, since the game medium can enter the variable device before passing through the special area, it is possible to increase the efficiency of variable display during the special state and extend the digestion time of the advantageous state.

For example, at a general winning opening, when a game ball wins, at least four or more winning balls must be paid out, but with respect to the starting winning opening for accepting a special design or a regular design big hit/win lottery, prize balls are paid out. There are no restrictions on the number. Therefore, in this embodiment, by providing the normal start winning port 17 on the upstream side of the special variable winning ball device 20 (a part of the game ball flowing down to the right of the game area 7 is put into the normal starting winning port 17). Therefore, it takes a long time until a predetermined number of game balls are won in the specific variable winning ball device 20), and thus the short-time increase in the number of prize balls is suppressed without decreasing the number of prize balls during the big hit game. It is possible to suppress gambling.

In addition, for example, it is conceivable that the nails around the gate 32 are adjusted so that the rate of passage of the game balls to the gate 32 becomes low. In this case, the frequency of opening the variable winning ball device 15 decreases. Since the number of wasted balls increases, the player may be disadvantageous and the interest may be reduced. In this embodiment, even in such a case, since the normal start winning port 17 is provided, it is possible to increase the chances of drawing a normal symbol during the right-handed operation, and the player can change the winning ball device. It is possible to increase the chances of getting the opening opportunity of 15, and to suppress the decline in the interest of the game.

Further, in order to realize a sound gaming machine with reduced gambling qualities, it is necessary to meet the following criteria regarding the ball output rate in the test shooting test regarding the ball output performance. The payout rate is the ratio of the paid game balls to the shot game balls, and is based on the assumption that the game machine is 100 balls per minute (6000 balls per hour). (1) The ball output rate per short time (1 hour) is 33% to 220%, (2) The ball output rate per medium time (4 hours) is 40% to 150%, (3) Long time (10 hours) It is necessary to configure so that the payout rate per 1) falls within 50% to 133%. In this case, it is particularly difficult to design the gaming machine so as to satisfy the short-term payout rate of (1), and the number of payouts in the big hit game is reduced, or the interval period between rounds during the big hit game is lengthened. It is conceivable to configure the special variable winning ball device 20 or the layout of the game board 6 so that the game balls flowing down the game area 7 are spilled and it is difficult to win the prize. However, if such a configuration is adopted, there is a risk that the profits that the player can obtain will be reduced, and the interest of the game will be reduced (for example, it is possible to make the layout difficult to win or to lengthen the interval period). If so, amusement of the game will be deteriorated in that the winning efficiency of the special variable winning ball device 20 is lowered. Therefore, in this embodiment, by providing the normal starting winning port 17 on the upstream side of the special variable winning ball device 20, it is possible to prevent the profit of the player from decreasing, and even if the winning rate is short. It can be set within the above-mentioned reference range, and it is possible to prevent the interest of the game from decreasing.

Further, in this embodiment, the specific area is provided on a predetermined path (in the present example, to the right of the game area 7) of the downflow path along which the game medium flows down. Further, the effect control means executes a predetermined promotion notification (in this example, a first normal instruction notification, a first reduction instruction notification) for promoting the emission of the game medium to the predetermined route based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition. , A specific promotion notification for promoting the emission of the game medium to a specific area after a predetermined period (10 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the execution of the predetermined promotion notification (in this example, a second normal instruction notification, a second reduction) It is possible to execute instruction notification). Therefore, it is possible to appropriately notify the trigger for controlling to the advantageous state while suppressing the complexity of the effect.

In addition, in this embodiment, the case where the second instruction notification (notification for prompting the player to hit the game ball to the gate 32 as the operation area) is executed regardless of whether or not the KT state is set, is shown. Not limited to such a mode, for example, the second instruction notification may be executed only when the KT state is not in effect. Hereinafter, the first modification will be described in which the second instruction notification is executed only when the KT state is not in effect.

FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the instruction notification control process in the first modification. In the first modification, the processes of steps S4601 to S4603 are the same as those shown in FIG. Next, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the first KT state flag or the second KT state flag is set (step S4603X). If the first KT state flag or the second KT state flag is set (that is, if it is the first KT state or the second KT state), the process is ended as it is. If neither the first KT state flag nor the second KT state flag is set (that is, if it is a non-KT state), the process proceeds to step S4604 and subsequent steps to execute the second normal instruction notification or the second reduction instruction notification. Perform processing to Note that the processes of steps S4604 to S4606 are the same as those shown in FIG.

According to the modified example 1 shown in FIG. 65, the game control means can be controlled to a special state (small hitting game state in this example) advantageous to the player different from the advantageous state, and is controlled to the special state. It is possible to control to a special state (KT state in this example) with increased frequency. Further, the effect control means, in a predetermined state after the predetermined condition is satisfied (gate passage waiting state in this example), a specific promotion notification for promoting the emission of the game medium to the specific area (in this example, the second normal). The instruction notification, the second reduction instruction notification) can be executed, and the specific promotion notification is not executed when the special state is controlled. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the inconvenience of the effect in the special state while appropriately notifying the trigger of the start of the advantageous state.

In this embodiment, the gate passing waiting state after the big hit symbol is derived and displayed as the predetermined state after the predetermined condition is satisfied is shown as the state in which the passage of the gate 32 is aimed, but it is the KT state. Even in the case, it can be said that it is in a state of aiming to pass through the gate 32 in order to execute the variable display of the second special symbol.

Further, in this embodiment, the case where the common gate passage designation command (gate passage 1 designation command, gate passage 2 designation command) is transmitted regardless of whether or not the gate passage waiting state has been described. It may be configured to transmit a different gate passage designation command depending on whether or not it is in the waiting state. Hereinafter, a second modification will be described in which different gate passage designation commands are transmitted depending on whether or not the gate passage waiting state is set.

FIG. 66 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command in the second modification. In Modification 2, as shown in FIG. 66, a gate passage A designation command and a gate passage B designation command are used instead of the gate passage 1 designation command and the gate passage 2 designation command. In the second modification, the command C811 (H) is an effect control command (gate passage A designation command) that designates that the game ball has passed through the gate 32 when not in the gate passage waiting state. Command C812 (H) is an effect control command (gate passage B designation command) that designates that the game ball has passed through the gate 32 in the gate passage waiting state.

In the modified example 2, in the normal symbol process process shown in FIG. 35, the CPU 56 first confirms whether or not it is in the gate passage waiting state, instead of the processes of steps S5112 to S5114. Whether or not the gate passage waiting state is, for example, whether or not the value of the first special symbol process flag indicates the first gate passage waiting process, and the value of the second special symbol process flag It can be determined by checking whether or not the value indicates the second gate passage waiting process. If it is not in the gate passage waiting state, the CPU 56 controls to transmit a gate passage A designation command to the effect control microcomputer 200. On the other hand, in the gate passage waiting state, the CPU 56 controls to transmit a gate passage B designation command to the effect control microcomputer 200.

It should be noted that the gate passage designation command may be configured to be transmittable in a mode in which it is possible to specify whether or not it is in the KT state in addition to whether or not it is in the gate passage waiting state. In this case, for example, a gate passage 1A designating command designating that the game ball has passed through the gate 32 in the non-KT state and not in the gate passage waiting state, and the gate 32 in the non-KT state in the gate passage waiting state. A gate passage 1B designation command that designates that the game ball has passed, a gate passage 2A designation command that designates that the game ball has passed the gate 32 in the KT state when not in the gate passage waiting state, and in the KT state. A gate passage 2B designation command that designates that the game ball has passed through the gate 32 in the gate passage waiting state may be transmitted. Then, in the normal symbol process processing, it is determined whether or not it is in the KT state and whether or not it is in the gate passage waiting state, and based on the determination result, one of these four types of gate passage designation is performed. It suffices to perform control for transmitting a command to the effect control microcomputer 200.

According to the second modification shown in FIG. 66, a game control means (in this example, a game control microcomputer 560) for controlling the progress of the game, and a performance control means for controlling the performance based on the information from the game control means. (In this example, the effect control microcomputer 200). In addition, the game control means, after a predetermined condition (in this example, the big hit symbol is derived and displayed) is satisfied, the game medium (game ball in this example) passes through the specific region (gate 32 in this example). Based on the above, it is possible to control to an advantageous state advantageous to the player (in this example, a big hit game state). Further, the game control means can execute a variable display of the ordinary identification information (in this example, an ordinary symbol) based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the specific area, and the display result of the variable display of the ordinary identification information is Based on the predetermined display result (the winning symbol in this example), the variable device (variable winning ball device 15 in this example) is controlled to the easy entry state (open state in this example). In addition, the game control means outputs specific passage information (gate passage A designation command, gate passage B designation command in this example) that differs depending on the state, based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the particular area. Therefore, the state can be appropriately grasped on the side of the effect control means, and the information can be appropriately output.

In the second modification, as a case of “outputting different specific passage information depending on the state”, when transmitting a gate passage A designation command or a gate passage B designation command depending on whether or not the gate passage waiting state is set. However, it is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, in the case of "output different specific passage information depending on the state", as shown in FIG. 17, the gate passage 1 designation command or the gate passage 2 designation command is transmitted depending on whether or not the KT state is set. It is a concept that includes what you do.

Further, as a case of “outputting different specific passage information depending on the state”, for example, different gate passage designation commands are transmitted depending on whether the state is the probable variation state or the high base state. You may comprise. Further, as a case of "outputting different specific passage information depending on the state", for example, when the game ball passes through the gate 32 when not in the gate passage waiting state, the gate passage specifying command is transmitted while the gate passage waiting state is transmitted. When the game ball passes through the gate 32, the gate passage designation command is not transmitted, but a command different from the gate passage designation command (for example, a jackpot start designation command (fanfare command)) is transmitted. May be.

Further, in this embodiment, the gaming machine configured such that the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be simultaneously changed and can be controlled in the KT state has been described, but the invention is not limited to such an aspect. For example, even a gaming machine that changes the first special symbol and the second special symbol in the winning order, or preferentially changes the second special symbol, or a gaming machine that is not controlled in the KT state, operates normally When configured to have a dual-purpose gate that also serves as an area, regardless of whether it is in the gate passage waiting state, a common gate passage specification command is transmitted, or a different gate passage specification command is issued depending on the state. It may be configured to be transmitted.

According to this embodiment, the game control means (in this example, the game control microcomputer 560) for controlling the progress of the game, and the effect control means for controlling the effect based on the information from the game control means ( In this example, it is provided with a production control microcomputer 200). The game control means stores the information regarding the variable display of the first identification information as the first storage storage means (first suspension storage buffer in this example) that stores the information regarding the variable display, and the information regarding the variable display of the second identification information. A special state that includes a second holding storage means (second holding storage buffer in this example) that is stored as holding storage and is different from the advantageous state (in this example, big hit game state) and is advantageous to the player. (In this example, a small hit game state) can be controlled, and in a special state (KT state in this example) in which the frequency of being controlled to a special state is increased, it is possible to control information (production control in this example). Command) can be output to the production control means. Further, the effect control means, corresponding to the variable display of any one of the first identification information and the second identification information depending on whether or not the special state is controlled, the effect identification information (in this example, It is possible to execute variable display of (background pattern). Further, the production control of the first information (in this example, the first customer waiting demo display designation command) is performed based on the fact that there is no hold storage stored by the first hold storage means when the variable display of the first identification information is finished. The second information (in the present example, the second customer waiting demonstration display designation can be output based on the fact that there is no hold storage that the second hold storage means stores when the variable display of the second identification information is finished. Command) can be output to the production control means. Therefore, the information regarding the variable display state of the two pieces of identification information can be appropriately output to the effect control unit.

For example, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2015-156952, which is configured to be capable of simultaneously performing the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information, the two identification information It is necessary to appropriately output the information regarding the variable display state to the effect control means. On the other hand, according to this embodiment, when the variable display of the first identification information is finished, the first information is output to the effect control means based on the fact that there is no hold storage stored in the first hold storage means. It is possible to output the second information to the effect control means based on the fact that there is no holding storage that the second holding storage means stores when the variable display of the second identification information is finished. The information regarding the variable display state of can be appropriately output to the effect control means.

Further, according to this embodiment, it is possible to output information (background designation command in this example) corresponding to whether or not the special state is controlled to the effect control means. Further, the effect control means, when the special state is controlled, regardless of whether or not the variable display of the first identification information is being performed, the absence control is performed based on the reception of the second information. In the example, the display of the second demo display) can be executed. Therefore, in the gaming machine configured to be able to simultaneously perform the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information, it is possible to perform the absence production at appropriate timing.

Further, according to this embodiment, it is possible to output information (background designation command in this example) corresponding to whether or not the special state is controlled to the effect control means. In addition, the effect control means, when not controlled to the special state, regardless of whether or not the variable display of the second identification information is being performed, the absence control based on the reception of the first information (the book). In the example, the display of the first demo display) can be executed. Therefore, in the gaming machine configured to be able to simultaneously perform the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information, it is possible to perform the absence production at appropriate timing.

In this embodiment, the case where the first demo display and the second demo display are displayed based on the reception of the first customer waiting demo display designating command and the second customer waiting demo display designating command has been described. It is not limited to such an aspect. For example, a predetermined menu guide image display is displayed based on the reception of the first customer waiting demo display designation command in the non-KT state, or the reception of the second customer waiting demo display designation command in the KT state. Alternatively, a predetermined menu guide image display may be displayed. In this case, for example, as a predetermined menu guidance image display, a guidance screen for switching the effect mode, adjusting the brightness of the liquid crystal screen or the LED, and adjusting the volume of the sound output from the speaker 27 is displayed. It may be displayed.

Further, according to this embodiment, it is possible to output information (background designation command in this example) corresponding to whether or not the special state is controlled to the effect control means. Further, when not controlled to the special state, it is possible to execute the variable display of the effect identification information corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information (in this example, the variable display of the first special symbol in the non-KT state). The variable display of the background design is executed corresponding to the), and when the special state is controlled, the variable display of the effect identification information can be executed corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information (in this example. , In the KT state, the variable display of the background symbol is executed corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol). Further, the effect control means, corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information, predetermined identification information having lower visibility than the effect identification information (in this example, the first decorative pattern, the second It is possible to execute a variable display of (decorative design) (in this example, the variable display of the first decorative pattern is executed in response to the variable display of the first special symbol, and the variable display of the second special symbol is associated with the variable display of the second special symbol. 2 Perform variable display of special symbols). Therefore, the display identification information is variably displayed by the variable display of the predetermined identification information while changing the identification information of the one for which the display of the production identification information having high visibility is changed depending on whether or not the special state is controlled. The variable display state of the identification information of the person who is not the target can be notified.

In this embodiment, as variable display of the predetermined identification information having low visibility, the variable display of the first decorative pattern on the first variable display portion 9a provided on the display screen of the effect display device 9 and the effect display. The case of executing the variable display of the second decorative pattern on the second variable display portion 9b provided on the display screen of the device 9 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, the variable display of the first decorative design and the second decorative design may be executed by lighting and displaying an LED or a lamp provided outside the effect display device 9 (liquid crystal display device).

Further, according to this embodiment, it is possible to output information (background designation command in this example) corresponding to whether or not the special state is controlled to the effect control means. Further, the effect control means can execute the position detection process of the movable member (in this example, the movable member initial operation process). In this case, when the special state is not controlled, the position detection process can be executed based on the reception of the first information, regardless of whether the variable display of the second identification information is executed (( In this example, in the non-KT state, the movable member initial operation process is executed when the first customer waiting demo display designation command is received), and when the special state is controlled, the variable display of the first identification information is executed. The position detection process can be executed based on the reception of the second information regardless of whether or not the second member wait demo display display command is received in the KT state in this example. Perform the initial operation process). Therefore, the position detection process of the movable member can be executed at an appropriate timing.

In addition, in this embodiment, as the information corresponding to whether or not the special state is controlled, the case where the background designation command is transmitted in a mode capable of specifying the gaming state is shown (see FIG. 17), but It is not limited to various forms. For example, a low-probability/non-KT state, a low-probability/first KT state, a high-probability/first KT state, or a high-probability/second KT state is configured to transmit a state designation command that designates a gaming state. You may.

Further, according to this embodiment, based on the execution of the variable display, a special state that is different from the advantageous state (the big hit game state in this example) and is advantageous to the player (the small hit in this example). It is possible to control to a special state (in this example, a KT state) in which the frequency is controlled to a special state. In addition, a launch promotion notification (in this example, a right-handed display is displayed) for prompting a launch operation of a game medium (in this example, a game ball) to a predetermined route (in this example, the right side of the game area 7). It is feasible. In this case, when the special state is controlled, the launch promotion notification can be executed in a predetermined manner (in this example, as shown in FIG. 60(A), in the lower center part of the display screen of the effect display device 9). A large-sized "right-handed!" character display is displayed), and the variable display period is longer than a predetermined period (in this example, it is a variable display with reach). The launch promotion notification can be executed in a specific mode different from the predetermined mode (in this example, as shown in FIG. 60(B), from the large-sized “right-handed!” character display to the small-sized “right-handed!”). "Is changed to the character display). Therefore, by changing the mode of launch promotion notification according to the type of variable display, it is possible to execute appropriate launch promotion notification.

For example, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2017-088643, the mode of launch promotion notification is uniform when it is controlled to a special state, and it is not always possible to execute appropriate launch promotion notification. Specifically, for example, when a variable display accompanied by a reach is executed, the variation time is generally long, and even if the player hits to the right, the player cannot immediately expect to win the special winning opening or the special winning opening 24, and a small hit does not occur. Even when the variable display is executed, it is not possible to expect a prize to the special winning opening or the special winning opening 24 immediately by right-handing. When the launch promotion notification (in this example, the right-handed display is displayed) is executed in the same manner and the player continues to perform the right-handed operation, the game ball that has been fired is wastefully consumed, and the player The disadvantages of the may increase. On the other hand, according to this embodiment, when the special state is controlled, the launch promotion notification can be executed in a predetermined manner, and the variable display period is equal to or longer than the predetermined period. Since it is possible to execute the launch promotion notification in a specific mode different from the predetermined mode during execution of the display, it is possible to execute the appropriate launch promotion notification by changing the mode of the launch promotion notification depending on the type of variable display. ..

In addition, in this embodiment, the case where the display is switched to the small-sized right-handed display as the launch promotion notification according to the specific mode is shown, but the variable display period is not less than the predetermined period, without being limited to such a mode. Based on the above, it may be configured to temporarily not perform the launch promotion notification (for example, to temporarily erase the right-handed display).

Further, in this embodiment, the case where it is determined whether or not the variable display period is equal to or longer than a predetermined period by determining whether or not the variable display is accompanied by reach is shown. It is not limited to the mode. For example, by confirming the fluctuation time itself based on the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern command and determining whether the fluctuation time is a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) or more, the launch promotion notification according to the specific mode is performed. It may be configured to switch to.

Further, in this embodiment, if the variation display is accompanied by a reach, at the start of the variation, the predetermined mode (large size in this example) is switched to the specific mode (small size in this example) to notify the launch promotion (book). In the example, the case of performing the right-handed display) is shown, but the switching timing is not limited to the mode shown in this embodiment. For example, the predetermined mode may be switched to the specific mode at the timing before the reach is generated during the variable display, or the predetermined mode may be switched to the specific mode at the timing after the reach is generated.

Further, according to this embodiment, when the launch promotion notification is executed in the specific mode during the execution of the variable display, the predetermined display result that does not correspond to the operation of the variable device is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display. Based on this, it is possible to execute the launch promotion notification by changing from the specific mode to the predetermined mode (in this example, as shown in FIG. 60(C), in the case of stopping and displaying the deviating symbol as the stopping symbol of the background symbol). , The small-sized “right-handed!” text display is changed to the large-sized “right-handed!” text display). Therefore, it is possible to change the mode of the launch promotion notification at an appropriate timing.

In addition, according to this embodiment, as the special state, the first special state (the first KT state in this example) and the second special state (the first special state in the present example) having a higher degree of advantage than the first special state. 2KT state). In addition, when the first special state is controlled, it is possible to execute the launch promotion notification in a special mode different from the case where the second special state is controlled (in this example, the display screen of the effect display device 9 is displayed. A small-sized "right-handed" character display is displayed at the upper right end of. Therefore, it is possible to highlight the change in the mode of the launch promotion notification when the second special state is controlled.

According to this embodiment, the variable display period is longer than or equal to a predetermined period (in this example, the variable display is accompanied by the reach), or the variable display is not controlled to a special state as a display result. Based on the fact that the display result is displayed by derivation (in this example, it is not a variable display that is a small hit), it is possible to execute the firing promotion notification in a specific mode during execution of the variable display. Therefore, it is possible to execute the launch promotion notification according to the specific mode, corresponding to the period when the profit is not obtained.

Further, according to this embodiment, when the predetermined effect (reach in this example) is executed, it is possible to execute the firing promotion notification in the specific mode during execution of the variable display, and the specific mode is more preferable than the predetermined mode. The launch promotion notification can be executed in a mode in which the degree of recognition is low (in this example, as shown in FIG. 60, the right-handed display 310 is changed to a smaller size than the right-handed display (large) 309). Therefore, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the effect of the predetermined effect while prompting the player to stop the firing operation.

In this embodiment, the case where the large-sized right-handed display (large) 309 is displayed as the predetermined mode and the small-sized right-handed display 310 is displayed as the specific mode is shown. I can't. For example, it is configured that the right-handed display is displayed in a display color that is relatively conspicuous such as red or rainbow as a predetermined mode, and the right-handed display is displayed in a display color that is relatively unnoticeable such as blue or green as a specific mode. May be. Further, for example, as a predetermined mode, right-handed display is displayed in a relatively prominent place such as near the center of the display screen, and as a specific mode, right-handed display is displayed in a relatively inconspicuous place such as an edge of the display screen. You may. Further, for example, the predetermined mode and the specific mode may be switched depending on the presence or absence of the animation display. In this case, for example, as a predetermined mode, a right hit display is displayed as an animation display in which right arrow display moves in sequence, and as a specific mode, a still image display in which the right arrow display is stationary. Right-handed display may be performed. In such a manner, the right-handed display may be displayed in a form that is conspicuous as the predetermined mode and the right-handed display may be displayed in a mode that is not noticeable as the specific mode.

Further, according to this embodiment, it is possible to control to a special state (KT state in this example) that is different from the advantageous state (in this example, big hit game state) and is advantageous to the player. Further, based on the fact that the number of game media (game balls in this example) stored in the storage unit (surplus ball receiving tray (lower plate) 4 in this example) exceeds a predetermined number, a specific notification (book) In the example, the full tank error notification shown in FIG. 61 can be executed. In this case, when the advantageous state is controlled, the specific notification can be executed in a predetermined manner (in this example, as shown in FIG. 61A, when the big hit game is in progress, the effect display device). 9, the full error notification (large) 313 is displayed), and when the special state is controlled, the specific notification can be executed by the specific mode having a lower recognition degree than the predetermined mode (in this example, FIG. As shown in B), when the KT state is in effect, the full display error notification (small) 314 is displayed on the effect display device 9). Therefore, it is possible to execute appropriate specific notification corresponding to the state of the game.

For example, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-051137, the mode of the specific notification is the same when the advantageous state is controlled and when the special state is controlled, and the appropriate specificity is not always required. Notification cannot be performed. Specifically, as shown in this embodiment, in the gaming machine configured to be controllable in the special state (KT state), the variable display result of the second special symbol may be off. In the case where a plurality of nails are provided on the downward flow path to the special winning opening 24 and the winning is made difficult, the game balls are stored to some extent during the small hitting game in the special state during the small hitting game. There is a need. However, under such a circumstance, if a certain number of game balls are removed from the storage section (dish) according to the specific notification (full tank error notification), it becomes necessary to frequently replenish the game balls in a special state, and the game is played. From the perspective of another person, it may be an inappropriate notification. In addition, even in a gaming machine that does not have a special state (KT state), in a high base state, if the big hit is not won, it is a state in which the game balls can continue to decrease from the storage part (plate), so a specific notification ( If a certain amount of game balls are pulled out from the storage part (dish) according to the full tank error notification), it becomes necessary to frequently replenish the game balls, which may result in inappropriate notification from the player's perspective. is there. On the other hand, according to this embodiment, when the advantageous state is controlled, the specific notification can be executed according to the predetermined mode, and when the special state is controlled, the degree of recognition is higher than that of the predetermined mode. Since the specific notification can be executed in a low specific mode, it is possible to execute an appropriate specific notification corresponding to the state of the game.

In this embodiment, the case where the large-sized full tank error notification is performed as the predetermined mode and the small-sized full tank error notification is performed as the specific mode has been described, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, as a predetermined mode, a specific notification (full tank error notification) is performed in a display color that is relatively conspicuous such as red or rainbow, and as a specific mode, a specific notification is displayed in a display color that is relatively inconspicuous (blue or green) (full tank error notification). May be configured to perform. Also, for example, as a predetermined mode, a specific notification (full tank error notification) is given to a relatively prominent part such as near the center of the display screen, and as a specific mode, a specific notification is given to a relatively inconspicuous part such as an edge of the display screen (full tank error notification). ) Is performed (in this case, when a specific notification (full tank error notification) is performed at the edge of the display screen, etc., a display location that does not interfere with other productions such as reach production and notice production) It is desirable to give specific notification (full tank error notification). Further, for example, when the effect display device (liquid crystal display device) is configured to include a main display device and a sub display device, as a predetermined aspect, a specific notification (full tank error notification) in the main display device and the sub display device. As a specific mode, the specific notification (full tank error notification) may be performed only in the sub display device. Further, as a specific mode, a specific notification with a predetermined notification sound output or a high volume (full error notification) is performed, and as a specific mode, a specific notification without a predetermined notification sound output or a low volume (full tank error notification). May be configured to perform. Further, as a predetermined mode, a specific notification with a large number of predetermined notification displays (full error notification) is performed, and as a specific mode, a specific notification with a small number of predetermined notification displays (full error notification) is performed. Good. Further, the specific notification (full-tank error notification) may be configured such that the LED and the lamp have different light emission modes between the predetermined mode and the specific mode. In such a manner, the specific notification (full error notification) may be performed in a manner that is conspicuous as the predetermined mode, and the specific notification (full error notification) may be performed in a mode that is less noticeable as the specific mode.

Further, in this embodiment, the predetermined mode is switched to the specific mode only when the specific notification (full tank error notification) is performed, and the display mode is not switched for other errors. For example, with respect to an error other than a full tank error such as a door opening error, a ball out error, a prize ball error, a radio wave error, a magnetic error, a vibration error, and an abnormal winning, the display mode is not switched. That is, with respect to these errors, since they are highly important errors and have no meaning to reduce the visibility, they are configured to be always displayed in a mode that is easily visible.

Further, according to this embodiment, the specific notification can be executed in the specific mode even when the special state is not controlled (in the present example, as shown in FIG. 61(B), in the non-KT state). Even if there is, a full tank error notification (small) 314 is displayed on the effect display device 9). Therefore, it is possible to execute the appropriate specific notification even when the control is not performed in the special state where it is difficult to obtain a profit.

Not limited to the mode shown in this embodiment, for example, the full tank error notification may be executed in different modes in the KT state and the non-KT state. Further, the full tank error notification may be executed in different modes in the first KT state and the second KT state.

In addition, according to this embodiment, it is possible to perform variable display of the first identification information (the first special symbol in this example) and variable display of the second identification information (the second special symbol in this example). , It is possible to control to a special state (small hitting game state in this example) that is advantageous to the player and is different from the advantageous state (large hitting game state in this example) and special state (KT state in this example) Is. Further, the special state is a state in which the frequency of control to the special state is increased, and the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information can be simultaneously executed (in the present example, the first special information is displayed). The variable display of the symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol can be executed at the same time), when the special state is controlled, the second by the short variable display period as compared with the case where the special state is not controlled. Variable display of the identification information can be executed (in this example, as shown in FIGS. 12 to 14, in the KT state, the variable time that is not selected in the non-KT state is 1 second, 2 seconds, 5 seconds. Variation pattern may be selected). Further, when the variable display of the second identification information is executed, it is possible to control the special state at a higher rate than in the case where the variable display of the first identification information is executed (in this example, the second special information is controlled). Only when the variable display of the symbol is executed, it may be determined as a small hit). Therefore, appropriate specific notification can be executed in the special state in which the degree of increase in profit is lower than that in the advantageous state.

In addition, in this embodiment, the case where the surplus ball receiving plate (lower plate) 4 is provided in addition to the hit ball supply plate (upper plate) 3 is shown, but the surplus ball receiving plate (lower plate) 4 is provided. Instead, the gaming machine may be configured to provide only the hitting ball supply plate (upper plate) 3, and the ball hitting supply plate (upper plate) 3 may be provided with an opening for ball removal. That is, the storage unit (in this example, the hit ball supply plate (upper plate) 3) is a payout passage (in this example, the hit ball supply plate (upper plate) 3) through which the game medium to be paid out (in this example, game ball) passes. Is provided between the entrance side passage) and the launch passage (in this example, the exit side passage of the hitting ball supply tray (upper tray) 3) through which the game medium to be launched passes, and can be opened and closed by the operation of the player. An opening (in this example, an opening for removing a ball) for ejecting a game medium may be provided. According to such a structure, when the opening provided in the storage section is in the open state, it is possible to execute an appropriate specific notification in the case of a structure in which a certain number of storageable game media cannot be secured. ..

In the above-described embodiment, for example, the award ball number display may be highlighted in the second KT state in which the winning of the special winning opening 24 can be expected. Hereinafter, a modified example 3 in which the award ball number display is highlighted in the second KT state will be described.

In the embodiment described above, the first prize ball number counter and the second prize ball number counter are separately provided, and the prize ball number in the condominium and the prize ball number in the second KT state are separately provided. Although the case of counting is shown, in the third modification, regardless of whether the player is in a condominium or in the second KT state using only one prize ball number counter, the big hit game and the KT state are large. The number of prize balls obtained by winning the prize holes and the special prize holes 24 is cumulatively counted.

Further, in the third modification example, during the first KT state, the effect display device 9 displays the number of prize balls according to the first KT pattern. For example, the number of prize balls is displayed at the upper right corner of the display screen of the effect display device 9. Further, in the second KT state, the effect display device 9 displays the number of prize balls according to the second KT pattern. For example, the number of prize balls is displayed near the center of the display screen of the effect display device 9. Further, during the big hit game, the number of prize balls is displayed in the big hit pattern on the effect display device 9. For example, the number of prize balls is displayed at the lower left corner of the display screen of the effect display device 9.

In the third modification, the effect control microcomputer 200 (specifically, the effect control CPU 201) is in the effect control main process during a big hit game or in a KT state (first KT state, second KT state). A prize sphere number display process is executed to control the display of the prize sphere number display indicating the number of won spheres. Further, in the third modification, 15 prize balls are paid out both when one game ball is won at the special winning opening and when one game ball is won at the special winning opening 24.

67 to 70 are flowcharts showing the prize ball number display processing in the modified example 3. In the prize ball number display processing, the effect control CPU 201 first confirms whether or not the special winning opening winning flag is set (step S500). If the special winning opening winning flag is set (that is, if the winning in the big winning opening occurs), the effect control CPU201 resets the big winning opening winning flag (step S501), and the first prize. It is confirmed whether or not the first prize ball increase effect executing flag indicating that the ball increase effect is being executed is set (step S502). If the first prize ball increasing effect executing flag is set (that is, if the first prize ball increasing effect is already being executed), the process proceeds to step S506.

If the first prize sphere increase effect execution flag is not set (that is, if the first prize sphere increase effect is not yet executed), the effect control CPU 201 causes the effect display device 9 to play the prize ball at the first speed. The control to start the effect of increasing the number by 1 and to start the first prize ball increase effect is performed (step S503). Further, the effect control CPU 201 sets the first prize ball increase effect executing flag (step S504). Then, the process proceeds to step S510.

In this modified example 3, the prize ball number display is displayed during the big hit game and the KT state (first KT state, second KT state), but when the prize ball number display is displayed, the big winning opening When a game ball is won in or the special winning opening 24, the prize ball increasing effect is executed such that the number of prize balls indicated by the number of prize balls is increased by one. In Modified Example 3, there are three types of prize ball increase effects, that is, a first prize ball increase effect to a third prize ball increase effect. The first prize ball increase effect is that the number of prize balls is increased by one at a relatively high first speed (for example, 0.1 seconds) when the number of prize balls is displayed in the big hit pattern during the big hit game. It is an effect that is executed in a manner that it is performed. In addition, the second prize ball increase effect is the number of prize balls at a relatively high first speed (for example, 0.1 seconds) when the prize ball number display according to the first KT pattern is displayed in the first KT state. Is an effect executed in such a manner as to increase by 1. In addition, the third prize ball increase effect is that when the number of prize balls display according to the second KT pattern is displayed in the second KT state, the number of prize balls is increased at a relatively low second speed (for example, 0.5 seconds). Is an effect that is executed in such a manner as to increase by 1.

In this modified example 3, the special winning opening winning flag is set (a winning of the big winning opening occurs) means that the big hit game is being played and the number of prize balls is displayed according to the big hit pattern. Therefore, in step S503, the first prize ball increase effect in which the number of prize balls is increased by one at the first speed in the prize ball number display displayed in the big hit pattern is started.

If the special winning opening winning flag is not set (that is, if the winning in the big winning opening has not occurred), the effect control CPU201 determines whether or not the first prize ball increase effect executing flag is set. Is confirmed (step S505). If the first prize sphere increase effect executing flag is not set (that is, if the first prize sphere increase effect is not being executed), the process proceeds to step S510.

If the flag for executing the first prize sphere increasing effect is set in step S502 or step S505 (that is, if the first prize sphere increasing effect is being executed), the effect control CPU 201 displays the award in the number of prize balls. It is confirmed whether or not the display for increasing the number of balls by 1 is finished (that is, whether or not 0.1 seconds has elapsed since the start of the effect for increasing the number of prize balls by 1) (step S506). If the display for increasing the number of prize balls by 1 is finished in the prize ball number display, the effect control CPU 201 indicates that the number of prize balls after the number of prize balls is increased by 1 is indicated by the prize ball number counter. It is confirmed whether or not the state is in agreement with (step S507). If the number of prize balls displayed after the number of prize balls is incremented by 1 does not match the number of prize balls indicated by the prize ball counter, the effect control CPU 201 causes the effect display device 9 to again display the prize balls at the first speed. The effect of increasing the number by 1 is started, and the control for starting the first prize ball increasing effect is performed (step S508). Then, the process proceeds to step S510.

If the number of prize balls displayed after the number of prize balls is increased by 1 matches the number of prize balls indicated by the prize ball number counter, the effect control CPU 201 resets the first prize ball increase effect executing flag ( (Step S509), the first prize ball increase effect is ended. Then, the process proceeds to step S510.

In this modified example 3, when a winning to the special winning opening occurs during the big hit game, the payout control of 15 prize balls is immediately performed (see step S30), and 15 is immediately added to the prize ball number counter. However, by executing the processing of steps S500 to S509, the award ball number display is not immediately updated to the value to which 15 is added, but is set to the first speed (0.1 in this example). The number of prize balls is updated in such a manner that the number of prize balls increases by 1 every second). Therefore, in the third modification, it takes 0.1 seconds×15=1.5 seconds until the update of the number of all 15 prize balls is completed with respect to one winning in the special winning opening. The numerical display will be updated. In this case, a case may occur in which the next winning a prize is won before the update of the number of all 15 award balls is completed. For example, the fifth award ball out of the 15 award balls. Even if the next big prize hole is won at the stage where the display of the number of prize balls is only displayed up to now, the display of the mode in which the number of the next 6 prize balls is continuously increased is displayed. That is, the 1st prize ball increase effect will be continuously executed until the display of the increase of all the prize balls including the number of prize balls added by the new winning is finished (in this case, the addition). The number of prize balls displayed will be updated in 3.0 seconds including the number of prize balls generated in (). However, in the third modification, when the first prize ball increase effect is executed, the first speed at which the number of prize balls is updated is relatively fast at 0.1 seconds, so at least the jackpot game is ended. By then, the production in which all the prize balls are increased is finished.

Next, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the special winning opening winning flag is set (step S510). If the special winning opening winning flag is set (that is, if the winning in the special winning opening 24 occurs), the effect control CPU201 resets the special winning opening winning flag (step S511), the second KT. It is confirmed whether or not the status flag is set (step S512). If the second KT flag is set (that is, in the second KT state), the process proceeds to step S523. If the second KT state flag is not set, the effect control CPU 201 checks whether or not the first KT state flag is set (step S513). If the first KT state flag is not set (that is, if it is in the non-KT state), the process is ended as it is. That is, even if the special winning opening 24 rarely occurs in the non-KT state, since the number of prize balls is not displayed in the first place, the process is ended without performing the prize ball increasing effect.

If the first KT state flag is set (that is, in the first KT state), the effect control CPU 201 indicates that the second prize ball increase effect is being executed, which indicates that the second prize ball increase effect is being executed. It is confirmed whether or not the flag is set (step S514). If the second prize ball increasing effect executing flag is set (that is, if the second prize ball increasing effect is already being executed), the process proceeds to step S519.

If the second prize ball increase effect execution flag is not set (that is, if the second prize ball increase effect is not yet executed), the effect control CPU 201 causes the effect display device 9 to play the prize ball at the first speed. Control for starting the effect of increasing the number by 1 and starting the second prize ball increasing effect (step S515). In addition, the effect control CPU201 sets the second prize ball increase effect in-execution flag (step S516). Then, the process proceeds to step S540.

In the third modification, the fact that the first KT state flag is set (during the first KT state) means that the number of prize balls is displayed according to the first KT pattern. Therefore, in step S515, the first KT pattern is displayed. In the displayed award ball number display, the second award ball increase effect in which the award ball number is increased by 1 at the first speed (0.1 second in this example) is started.

If the special winning opening winning flag is not set (that is, if the winning in the special winning opening 24 has not occurred), the third winning ball increase effect execution indicating that the third winning ball increase effect is being executed It is confirmed whether or not the medium flag is set (step S517). If the third prize ball increasing effect executing flag is set (that is, if the third prize ball increasing effect is being executed), the process proceeds to step S533. If the third prize sphere increase effect executing flag is not set (that is, if the third prize sphere increasing effect is not executed), the effect control CPU 201 sets the second prize sphere increasing effect executing flag. It is confirmed whether or not (step S518). If the second prize sphere increasing effect executing flag is not set (that is, if the second prize sphere increasing effect is not being executed), the process proceeds to step S540.

If the second prize ball increase effect executing flag is set in step S514 or step S518 (that is, if the second prize ball increase effect is being executed), the effect control CPU 201 displays the prize ball number in the prize display. It is confirmed whether or not the display for increasing the number of balls by 1 is finished (that is, whether or not 0.1 second has elapsed since the start of the effect for increasing the number of prize balls by 1) (step S519). If the display for increasing the number of prize balls by 1 is finished in the prize ball number display, the effect control CPU 201 indicates that the number of prize balls after the number of prize balls is increased by 1 is indicated by the prize ball number counter. It is confirmed whether or not the state coincides with (step S520). If the number of prize balls displayed after the number of prize balls is incremented by 1 does not match the number of prize balls indicated by the prize ball counter, the effect control CPU 201 causes the effect display device 9 to again display the prize balls at the first speed. Control for starting the effect of increasing the number by 1 and starting the second prize ball increasing effect (step S521). Then, the process proceeds to step S540.

If the number of prize balls displayed after the number of prize balls is increased by 1 matches the number of prize balls indicated by the prize ball number counter, the effect control CPU 201 resets the second prize ball increase effect executing flag ( (Step S522), the second prize ball increase effect is ended. Then, the process proceeds to step S540.

In this modified example 3, when the special winning opening 24 in the small hit game that occurs during the first KT state occurs, the payout control of 15 prize balls is immediately performed (see step S30), and immediately. Although 15 is added to the prize ball counter, the prize ball number display is not immediately updated to the value to which 15 is added by executing the processing of steps S510 to S522, but the first speed The award ball number display is updated in such a manner that the award ball number increases by 1 in (in this example, 0.1 seconds). Therefore, in the third modified example, in the first KT state, with respect to one winning in the special winning opening 24, it takes 0.1 seconds×15=1.5 until the update of all 15 prize balls is completed. The prize ball number display will be updated over a period of seconds. In this case, it may be possible that the next special winning opening 24 is won before the update of the number of all 15 award balls is finished. For example, 5 out of 15 award balls are given. Even if the next special winning opening 24 is won at a stage where the increase in the number of prize balls is only displayed up to the eye, the display of the mode in which the number of the next sixth prize balls is continuously increased Is performed, and the second prize ball increase effect is continuously executed until the display of the increase of all the prize balls including the number of prize balls added by the new winning is finished (in this case, , The prize ball number display will be updated over 3.0 seconds including the number of additionally generated prize balls). However, in the third modified example, when the second prize ball increase effect is executed, the first speed at which the number of prize balls is updated is relatively fast at 0.1 seconds, so at least the small hit game is ended. By the time, the effect of increasing the number of all prize balls is completed.

If the second KT state flag is set in step S512 (that is, in the second KT state), the effect control CPU 201 performs control to start effect effect on the effect display device 9 (step S523). Next, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the prize effect executing flag indicating that the prize effect is being executed is set (step S524). If the prize effect executing flag is set (that is, if the prize effect is being executed), the effect control CPU 201 sets the value of the prize effect standby number counter for counting the number of waiting prize effects. One is added (step S525). Then, the process proceeds to step S529.

If the prize effect executing flag is not set (that is, if the prize effect is not being executed), the effect control CPU 201 displays the increased prize balls on the effect display device 9 (for example, a character display such as "+15"). Is displayed (step S526), and at the same time, the effect display device 9 is controlled to start a winning effect (step S527). In addition, the effect control CPU201 sets a winning effect execution flag (step S528). Then, the process proceeds to step S529.

Next, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the third prize ball increase effect executing flag indicating that the third prize ball increase effect is being executed is set (step S529). If the third prize ball increasing effect executing flag is set (that is, if the third prize ball increasing effect is already being executed), the process proceeds to step S533.

If the third prize sphere increase effect executing flag is not set (that is, if the third prize sphere increase effect is not yet executed), the effect control CPU 201 displays the second KT pattern on the effect display device 9. Control is performed to start the enlarged display of the number of prize balls being displayed (step S530). In addition, the effect control CPU 201 starts the effect of increasing the number of prize balls by 1 at the second speed on the effect display device 9 and performs the control of starting the third prize ball increase effect (step S531). In addition, the effect control CPU201 sets the third prize ball increase effect in-execution flag (step S532). Then, the process proceeds to step S540.

In the third modification, the fact that the second KT state flag has been set (during the second KT state) means that the number of prize balls display based on the second KT pattern is being displayed. Therefore, in step S531, the second KT pattern is displayed. In the displayed and enlarged display of the number of prize balls, the third prize-ball increasing effect in which the number of prize balls is increased by one at the second speed (0.5 seconds in this example) is started.

If the third prize sphere increase effect execution flag is set in step S517 or step S529 (that is, if the third prize sphere increase effect is being executed), the effect control CPU 201 determines that the effect effect end timing is reached. It is confirmed whether or not (step S533). Whether or not it is the end timing of the effect effect is set, for example, when the effect effect is started in step S523, a timer for measuring the effect effect effect period is set, and the timer has timed out. It can be determined by checking whether or not. If it is the end timing of the effect effect, the effect control CPU 201 controls the effect display device 9 to end the effect effect (step S534).

Next, the effect control CPU 201 determines whether or not the display for increasing the number of award balls by 1 is finished in the award ball number display (that is, whether 0.5 seconds has elapsed since the start of the effect for increasing the number of award balls by 1). Whether or not) is confirmed (step S535). If the display for increasing the number of prize balls by 1 is finished in the prize ball number display, the effect control CPU 201 indicates that the number of prize balls after the number of prize balls is increased by 1 is indicated by the prize ball number counter. It is confirmed whether or not the state is the same as that (step S536). If the number of prize balls displayed after the number of prize balls is increased by 1 does not match the number of prize balls indicated by the prize ball number counter, the effect control CPU 201 causes the effect display device 9 to again display the prize balls at the second speed. The effect of increasing the number by 1 is started, and the control for starting the third prize ball increasing effect is performed (step S537). Then, the process proceeds to step S540.

If the award ball number display after the award ball number is increased by 1 matches the award ball number indicated by the award ball number counter, the effect control CPU 201 is displayed in the effect display device 9 in the second KT pattern. Control for ending the enlarged display of the number of prize balls is performed (step S538). Further, the effect control CPU201 resets the third prize ball increase effect executing flag (step S539), and finishes the third prize ball increase effect. Then, the process proceeds to step S540.

In this modified example 3, when the special winning opening 24 occurs in the small hit game that occurs during the second KT state, the payout control of 15 prize balls is immediately performed (see step S30) and immediately. Although 15 is added to the prize ball number counter, the prize ball number display is immediately updated to the value to which 15 is added by executing the processing of steps S510, S517, S529 to S532, S535 to S359. Instead, the effect presentation is executed and the award ball count display is enlarged and displayed, and the award ball count increases by one at the second speed (0.5 seconds in this example). The sphere count display is updated. Therefore, in the third modification, in the second KT state, 0.5 seconds×15=7.5 until the update of the number of all 15 award balls is completed with respect to one winning in the special winning opening 24. The prize ball count display will be updated over a period of seconds. In this case, it is conceivable that the next special winning opening 24 will be won before the update of the number of all 15 award balls is finished. For example, 5 out of 15 award balls Even if the next special winning opening 24 is won at the stage where the number of prize balls is increased only up to the eyes, the display of the mode in which the number of the next sixth prize balls is continuously increased Is performed, and the third prize ball increase production is continuously executed until the display of the increase of all the prize balls including the number of prize balls added by the new winning is finished (in this case, , The prize ball number display will be updated over 15.0 seconds including the number of additionally generated prize balls).

Here, in the third modification, when the third prize ball increasing effect is executed, the second speed at which the number of prize balls is updated is relatively slow at 0.5 seconds, so the small hit game is ended. The production in which the number of all prize balls increases may not be completed by the time. In this modified example 3, the prize ball number display process is configured as an effect executed in the effect control main process, regardless of whether the variable display is being executed, or whether the big hit game or the small hit game is being executed. , Because it is executed every time the timer interrupt occurs, if the third prize ball increase effect is not finished during the small hit game, the third prize ball increase effect is displayed over the variable display after the end of the small hit game. It is continuously executed (further, the third prize ball increasing effect may be executed over a plurality of small hit games across the variable display).

Next, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the prize effect executing flag is set (step S540). If the winning effect execution flag is set (that is, if the winning effect is being executed), the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not it is the end timing of the winning effect (step S541). Whether or not it is the timing to end the winning effect is set, for example, when starting the winning effect in step S527, a timer for measuring the effect period of the winning effect is set, and the timer has timed out. It can be determined by checking whether or not. If it is the timing for ending the winning effect, the effect control CPU 201 performs control for ending the winning effect on the effect display device 9 (step S542).

Next, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the value of the winning effect standby number counter is 0 (step S543). If the value of the winning effect waiting number counter is not 0 (that is, if there is an unexecuted waiting winning effect), the effect control CPU 201 subtracts 1 from the value of the winning effect waiting number counter (step S544). In addition, the effect control CPU 201 performs control to display a prize ball increase display (for example, a character display such as “+15”) on the effect display device 9 (step S545), and starts winning effect on the effect display device 9. Control is performed (step S546).

If the value of the winning effect standby number counter is 0 (that is, if there is no waiting winning effect that has not been executed), the effect CPU 201 resets the winning effect executing flag (step S547).

In the third modified example, by executing the processing of steps S524 to S528 and S540 to S547, when the winning of the special winning opening 24 occurs in the second KT state, the award ball increase display is displayed. At the same time, the winning effect is executed. In this case, it is possible that a new prize is newly generated in the next special winning opening 24 during the execution of the winning effect. In such a case, the player waits until the winning effect being executed is completed, and After the winning award effect being executed is finished, the next prize ball increase display and the prize effect are executed (the award ball increase display and the prize effect are delayed and executed).

Here, in this modified example 3, since the display of the award ball increase display and the winning effect may be executed with a delay, all the award ball increase display and the winning effect are displayed until the small hit game is finished. In some cases, it cannot be executed. In the third modified example, the prize ball number display process is configured as an effect executed in the effect control main process, regardless of whether the variable display is being executed, or whether the big hit game or the small hit game is being executed. , It is executed every time the timer interrupt occurs, so if the display of the prize ball increase display or the winning effect is not finished during the small hit game, the prize ball increase display is displayed over the variable display after the small hit game is finished. Is displayed or a winning effect is executed (further, a prize ball increase display or winning effect may be executed over a plurality of small hit games with the variable display interposed therebetween).

In the third modification, the effect effect is also executed when the special winning opening 24 is won, but the effect effect is immediately executed at the timing when the special winning opening 24 is won. (See steps S523, S533, S534).

Further, in the third modification, the prize sphere number display effect is configured as an effect executed in the effect control main process, but the present invention is not limited to such an aspect, for example, in the background pattern process process, in steps S900 to S908. You may comprise so that a prize sphere number display effect may be performed before performing a process.

Further, in the third modified example, the case where the display of the award ball increase display and the winning effect are executed based on the occurrence of the winning in the special winning opening 24 is shown. The display may be turned on.

Further, in the third modification, the case where the award ball increase effect is executed based on the occurrence of the winning in the special winning opening or the special winning opening 24 and the effect in which the number of award balls is increased by 1 is executed. Although shown, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, a gaming machine configured to have a so-called general winning opening (a winning opening in which a variable winning ball device is not opened even if a prize is won and only a predetermined number (for example, 5) of winning balls are paid out) In the above, the prize ball increasing effect may be executed to execute the effect in which the number of prize balls is increased by 1 even when the winning in the general winning opening occurs. In this case, when a prize is awarded to the general winning opening, an effect in which the number of award balls is increased by one at a first speed (for example, 0.1 seconds) is uniformly performed in the award ball increasing effect. In the second KT state, the number of prize balls is increased by one at the second speed (for example, 0.5 seconds) in the prize ball increasing effect even when a prize is won in the general winning opening. You may carry out the production. Even in the case of such a configuration, if the first KT state (low probability/first KT state, high probability/first KT state), even if a prize is awarded to the general winning opening, the prize ball increase effect is produced. May be configured not to be executed.

Next, a specific example of the presentation mode of the prize ball increase production in the third modification will be described. 71 to 74 are explanatory views showing a specific example of the effect mode of the prize sphere increasing effect. Of these, FIG. 71 shows a specific example of an effect mode of a prize ball increase effect executed based on the occurrence of a prize at the special winning opening during the big hit game. In addition, FIG. 72 shows a specific example of the presentation mode of the prize ball increase production executed based on the occurrence of the winning at the special winning opening 24 in the small hit game in the first KT state. In addition, FIG. 73 and FIG. 74 show a specific example of the presentation mode of the prize ball increase production executed based on the occurrence of the winning in the special winning opening 24 in the small hit game in the second KT state. In addition, in FIGS. 71 to 74, the modes of the effect screen are changed in the order of (A), (B), (C),....

First, with reference to FIG. 71, a specific example of the effect mode of the award ball increase effect executed based on the occurrence of the winning at the special winning opening during the big hit game will be described. In the example shown in FIG. 71(A), when the big hit game is in progress, the effect display device 9 displays the number of prize balls 400 according to the big hit pattern, and also displays, for example, the character 401 and the character 401. A case is shown in which a character display 402 such as "Big hitting!" is displayed as a dialogue. In the third modified example, as shown in FIG. 71, the case where the number of prize balls display 400 is displayed at the lower left portion of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is shown as the number of prize balls display 400 by the big hit pattern. There is.

Next, it is assumed that a prize is won at the special winning opening during the big hit game. In this case, as shown in FIG. 71(B), an effect of increasing the number of prize balls by 1 at the first speed is executed on the effect display device 9, and the first prize ball increase effect is executed (see steps S500 to S509). ). In the third modified example, in the first prize ball increase effect, the prize ball number display is updated at a relatively high speed (0.1 second in this example) as the first speed, as shown in FIG. 71(C). As described above, when the updating of all the prize ball number displays is completed, the first prize ball increasing effect is finished.

Next, with reference to FIG. 72, a specific example of the effect mode of the prize ball increase effect executed based on the occurrence of the winning in the special winning opening 24 in the small hit game in the first KT state will be described. In the example shown in FIG. 72(A), in the first KT state, the effect display device 9 displays the award ball number display 403 according to the first KT pattern, and when a small hit occurs, For example, a case is shown in which a character display 404 such as “Small hit occurrence!” is displayed. In addition, in this modification 3, as shown in FIG. 72, as the prize sphere number display 403 based on the first KT pattern, a case where the prize sphere number display 403 is displayed at the upper right end portion of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is shown. ing.

Next, it is assumed that a prize has been received at the special winning opening 24 during the small hit game. In this case, as shown in FIG. 72(B), in the effect display device 9, the effect of increasing the number of prize balls by 1 is executed at the first speed, and the second prize ball increase effect is executed (see steps S510 to S522). ). In the third modification example, in the second prize ball increasing effect, the number of prize balls is updated at a relatively high speed (0.1 second in this example) as the first speed, as shown in FIG. 72(C). As described above, when the update of all the prize ball number displays is completed, the second prize ball increase effect is finished.

Next, with reference to FIG. 73 and FIG. 74, a specific example of the presentation mode of the prize ball increase production executed based on the occurrence of the winning in the special winning opening 24 in the small hit game in the second KT state will be described. To do. In the example shown in FIG. 73(A), in the second KT state, the effect display device 9 displays the award ball number display 405 based on the second KT pattern, and when a small hit occurs, For example, a case is shown in which a character display 406 such as “small hit occurrence!” is displayed. In the third modified example, as shown in FIGS. 73 and 74, as the prize sphere number display 405 based on the second KT pattern, the prize sphere number display 405 may be displayed near the center of the display screen of the effect display device 9. It is shown.

Next, it is assumed that a prize has been received at the special winning opening 24 during the small hit game. In this case, as shown in FIG. 73(B), the effect display is started on the effect display device 9 (see step S523), and the enlarged display of the number of prize balls display 405 is started (see step S530). In the example shown in FIG. 73(B), a case where a predetermined effect image 407 (for example, a glittering image) is displayed around the prize ball number display 405 is shown as the effect effect. .. Further, when a prize is generated in the special winning opening 24, as shown in FIG. 73(B), an award ball increase display is displayed (see step S526) and the winning effect is started (see step S527). In the example shown in FIG. 73(B), a case where a predetermined character 408 is displayed as a winning effect and a character display 409 such as “+15” is displayed as an award ball increase display is shown. Has been done.

As shown in FIG. 73(C), the effect display device 9 starts the effect of increasing the number of prize balls by 1 at the second speed, and starts the third prize ball increase effect (steps S510, S517, S529). ~ S539). In this modified example 3, as shown in FIGS. 73(C) to 74(H), in the third prize ball increase effect, the second prize ball increase effect is compared with the second prize ball increase effect. The number of prize balls is updated at a relatively slow speed (0.5 seconds in this example).

Next, as shown in FIG. 73(D), it is assumed that the effect effect has ended (the winning effect is still continuing), and a new winning a prize to the next special winning opening 24 has occurred during the execution of the winning effect. And In this case, as shown in FIG. 74(E), the effect effect is started on the effect display device 9 (see step S523). However, in this case, since the winning effect is still being executed, the new award ball increase display and the winning effect are not yet executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74(F), it is assumed that the effect effect has ended, and further, as shown in FIG. 74(G), the winning effect has ended. Then, when the winning effect is finished, based on the fact that there is a waiting winning effect that has not been executed, as shown in FIG. 74(H), the award ball increase display is displayed with a delay (see step S526) and the winning operation is performed. The effect is started (see step S527).

Then, after that, until the display of all the prize balls is updated including the number of prize balls based on the winning in the special winning opening 24 additionally generated in FIG. 74(E), the second prize ball increase production is performed. To be executed.

It should be noted that in the examples shown in FIGS. 73 and 74, a case where a glittering effect image 407 is displayed around the award ball number display 405 is shown as the effect effect, but such an effect is limited. Absent. For example, as an effect effect, an effect that acts on the prize ball number display 405 in some form, such as displaying an image that covers the prize ball number display 405, may be configured to be executed. By acting on the award ball number display 405 in this way, an effect may be executed such that the award ball number display 405 becomes difficult to visually recognize.

Further, in the third modification, the case where the number of prize balls obtained during the big hit game is added to the number of prize balls acquired during the KT state to display the number of prize balls is shown. However, the number of prize balls obtained during the big hit game and the number of prize balls obtained during the KT state may be separately displayed. For example, when a jackpot game is being played, the number of prize balls obtained in the jackpot game is displayed in the lower left portion of the display screen of the effect display device 9 in the manner shown in FIG. 71, and in the manner shown in FIG. The number of prize balls acquired during the first KT state is also displayed in the upper right end portion of the display screen of the effect display device 9, or the second KT is displayed near the center of the display screen of the effect display device 9 in the mode shown in FIG. 73(A). The number of award balls acquired during the state may also be displayed (the number of award balls acquired during the KT state may be displayed separately).

Further, for example, (1) when the KT state is once ended and the big hit game is started, the display of the number of prize balls obtained during the KT state is erased, and the number of prize balls displayed during the big hit game is displayed. It is possible to display the total number of prize balls acquired in the KT state until the KT state is ended and the non-KT state is entered. You may comprise. According to the aspect of (2), it is possible to improve the interest in the game by being able to recognize the number of won prize balls only in the KT state.

Next, the effect timing of effect in the small hit game in the second KT state will be described. FIG. 75 is a timing chart for explaining the effect timing of effect in the small hit game during the second KT state. As shown in FIG. 75, in the small hitting game in the second KT state, when the first winning occurs when the special winning opening 24 is in the open state, the enlarged display of the number of prize balls is started (step S530). The reference display of the number of prize balls for the first prize is started to start the third prize ball increase effect (see steps S510, S517, S529 to S539), and the effect effect is executed (step). (See S523). Further, as shown in FIG. 75, the winning effect for the first winning is started (see step S527).

Next, as shown in FIG. 75, in the small hitting game in the second KT state, if the second prize is generated while the second prize ball increasing effect and the prize effect are being executed, the second prize is won. The original effect effect is immediately executed, and the third award ball increasing effect is continuously executed by taking over the number of award balls increased by the second winning. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 75, since the winning effect is still being executed when the second winning occurs, the winning effect for the second winning is not immediately executed, and as shown in FIG. Then, after finishing the winning effect for the first winning, the winning effect for the second winning is executed with a delay.

Then, after that, even after the special winning opening 24 (special variable winning ball device 22) is controlled to be closed and the small hit game is finished, all the prize ball number displays are updated in the third winning ball increasing effect. If it is not over or if all the winning effects are not finished, as shown in FIG. 75, after the special winning opening 24 is closed, the variation display after the small hit game is finished, and also in the next small hit game, It is possible to continuously execute the third prize ball increasing effect and the winning effect.

According to the third modification, the count display (in this example, the number of prize balls is displayed) is updated and displayed based on a predetermined trigger (in this example, the game ball is won in the special winning opening or the special winning opening 24). It is possible, and a first display mode (in this example, the number of prize balls is displayed by a big hit pattern), and a second display mode that is more emphasized than the first display mode (in this example, the number of prize balls is displayed by the second KT pattern). ), the count display can be updated and displayed (in this example, as shown in FIG. 71, in the big hit pattern in the big hit game state, the prize ball number display 400 is updated and displayed at the lower left end of the effect display device 9, As shown in FIGS. 73 and 74, in the second KT pattern in the second KT state, the award ball number display 405 is enlarged and displayed near the center of the effect display device 9 and the effect image 407 is displayed and updated and displayed). Therefore, by providing a plurality of display modes for updating and displaying the count display, it is possible to improve the interest in the game when the count display is updated and displayed.

In addition, according to the third modification, it is determined whether or not a predetermined trigger (in this example, a game ball has won in the special winning opening 24) has been determined, and it is determined that the predetermined trigger has been reached. Based on this, the winning effect (in this example, the winning effect shown in FIGS. 73 and 74) can be executed. In addition, it is possible to execute the winning effect by the first pattern in which the winning effect is immediately executed based on the determination that the predetermined trigger has been given, and the second pattern in which the winning effect is executed at a timing later than the first pattern. (In this example, as shown in FIG. 75, when the special winning opening 24 is won, if the winning effect is not being executed, the winning effect is immediately executed, and the special winning opening 24 is won. If the winning production is being executed when the game is performed, the winning production is delayed. Therefore, by providing a plurality of timings for executing the winning effect, it is possible to improve the interest in the game when executing the winning effect.

Further, according to the third modified example, the count display (in this example, the number of prize balls is displayed) based on a predetermined trigger (in this example, the game ball is won in the special winning opening or the special winning opening 24). Update display is possible. Also, a first pattern in which the period until the updated counting result is displayed is the first period, and a second pattern in which the period until the updated counting result is displayed is the second period which is longer than the first period. Thus, the count display can be updated and displayed (in this example, when the prize ball count display 400 is displayed in the big hit pattern, the prize ball count is incremented by 1 at the first speed (for example, 0.1 seconds). When performing the display and displaying the number of prize balls 405 in the second KT pattern, the number of prize balls is increased by one at the second speed (for example, 0.5 seconds). Therefore, by providing a plurality of patterns for updating and displaying the count display, it is possible to improve the interest in the game when performing the update display of the count display.

Further, in the above-mentioned embodiment, “the ratio is different” is not limited to only the ratio being different due to the relationship such as A:B=70%:30% or A:B=30%:70%. It is a concept that also includes a relationship such that A:B=100%:0% and the ratio is different (that is, one is 100% allocation and the other is 0% allocation).

Further, in the above embodiment, for example, a case where a plurality of types of special symbols of “1” to “9”, background symbols (effect symbols), ordinary symbols are variably displayed and the display result is derived and displayed is shown. The display is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the variably displayed symbol does not necessarily have to be the same as the derivatized displayed symbol, and a symbol different from the variably displayed symbol may be derivatized and displayed. Further, it is not always necessary to variably display a plurality of types of symbols, and variable display may be executed using only one type of symbol. In this case, for example, the variable display may be executed by alternately lighting and blinking the one type of symbol display. And, even in this case, one type of symbol used for the variable display may be finally displayed as a derivative, or a symbol different from the one type of symbol may be finally derived and displayed. It may be one.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the effect control board 80, the sound output board 70, and the lamp driver board 35 are provided as the boards on which the circuits for controlling the effect device are mounted. You may mount on one board. Furthermore, a first effect control board (display control board) on which a circuit for controlling the effect display device 9 and the like is mounted, and a circuit for controlling other effect devices (a lamp, an LED, a speaker 27, etc.) are installed. You may make it provide two boards, such as two effect control boards.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 directly transmits the command to the effect control microcomputer 200, but the game control microcomputer 560 may be provided on another board (for example, FIG. 4). To the sound output board 70, the lamp driver board 35, etc., or the function of the circuit mounted on the sound output board 70 and the function of the circuit mounted on the lamp driver board 35. You may make it transmit a control command, and may be made to be transmitted to the production|generation control microcomputer 200 in the production|generation control board 80 via another board|substrate. In that case, the command may simply pass through on another board, or control means such as a microcomputer may be mounted on the voice output board 70, the lamp driver board 35, and the sound/lamp board so that the control means receives the command. Microcomputer 200 for effect control that controls the effect display device 9 by executing control related to voice control or lamp control in accordance with the above, and changing the received command as it is or by changing it to, for example, a simplified command. It may be transmitted to. Even in that case, the effect control microcomputer 200 performs the display control according to the effect control command directly received from the game control microcomputer 560 in the above-described embodiment, similarly to the sound output board 70 and the lamp driver. Display control can be performed in response to commands received from the substrate 35 or the sound/lamp substrate.

Further, in the above embodiment, a pachinko machine is taken as an example of a game machine, but the present invention is configured such that a plurality of types of coins are inserted and a predetermined bet number is set and a player operates an operation lever. When a symbol is rotated and the symbol is stopped in response to the player's operation of the stop button and the combination of the symbols is a specific symbol combination, a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player. It is also possible.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, an example in which a game medium is used as the game machine has been taken as an example, but the game machine according to the present invention is not limited to a game machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes, and a game ball. It can also be applied to an enclosed game machine that encloses a game medium such as, and gives a score when the condition for giving a prize is satisfied.

Further, in the above embodiment, there are probability variation big hit and normal big hit as the big hit type, and based on the fact that it was decided as the probability variation big hit as the big hit type, the gaming machine controlled to the probability variation state after the big hit game has been shown. , But is not limited to such a gaming machine. For example, a special variable winning ball device having a predetermined probability variation area provided therein (the probability variable area may be provided in only one special variable winning ball device, or a plurality of special variable prize balls may be provided). Probability variation area may be provided in part of the device), the probability variation is determined based on the game ball passing through the probability variation area in the special variable winning ball device during the big hit game, and the big hit game It is also possible to apply the configuration shown in the above embodiment to a gaming machine that is controlled to be in the probable variation state after the end.

The present invention is applicable to gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines.

1 Pachinko gaming machine 8a 1st special symbol display 8b 2nd special symbol display 9 Production display device 9a 1st variable display section 9b 2nd variable display section 9c Background symbol display section 13 1st start winning opening 13a 1st start opening Switch 14 Second start winning opening 14a Second starting opening switch 15 Variable winning ball device 17 Normal starting winning opening 17a Normal starting opening switch 18c Design reserve memory display unit 20 Special variable winning ball device 22 Special variable winning ball device 23 Bottom member 24 Special winning opening 23a First count switch 25a Second count switch 31 Main board 32 Gate 32 Gate switch 56 CPU
78 Movable Member 80 Performance Control Board 200 Performance Control Microcomputer 201 Performance Control CPU
560 Microcomputer for game control

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of playing a game,
A game control means for controlling the progress of the game,
And a production control means for controlling the production based on the information from the game control means,
The game control means,
Variable display execution means for executing variable display of the first identification information based on the entry of the game medium into the starting area, and variable display of the second identification information based on the entry of the game medium for the variable means. ,
An advantageous state that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player based on the fact that the game medium has entered the specific area after the predetermined condition is satisfied based on the variable display of the first identification information or the variable display of the second identification information. Control means,
Special state control means capable of controlling the variable means in a special state that is easy to control in an easy entry state,
A normal variable display executing means capable of executing a variable display of normal identification information based on the game medium having entered the specific area,
A variable-means control means for controlling the variable means to the easy-access state based on the display result of the variable display of the ordinary identification information being a predetermined display result,
An information output unit that outputs information to the effect control unit,
The special state control means can control, as the special state, a first special state and a second special state in which a game value is easily added by controlling the special state as compared with the first special state,
The information output means outputs different specific entry information depending on the state based on the entry of the game medium into the specific area,
The starting area is provided so that the game medium flowing down the first path of the flow path along which the game medium flows down can enter.
The specific area and the variable means are provided so that a game medium flowing down a second path of the downflow path different from the first path can enter.
The effect control means ,
If uncontrolled before Symbol advantageous condition and the special state not controlled in the based on the specific approach information is input, promoting notification to facilitate the firing of the game medium to the first path and the promotion notification means capable of performing,
See containing and a demonstration execution unit capable of executing the entry effect based on the game medium enters the special area when the control of the special conditions in the second special state,
When the game medium enters the special area during the control of the special state in the first special state, the entry effect is not executed,
The effect execution means displays, as the entry effect, a correspondence display corresponding to the game value given based on the entry of the game medium into the special area during the second special state, and the second special effect. A game machine characterized by executing an effect indicating that a game medium has entered the special area during a state .

Images